Nikon Digital Camera 25446 User Manual

DIGITAL CAMERA

User's Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Where to Find It

Find what you’re looking for from:

➜

pp. viii–xiii

pp. iv–vii

The Table of Contents

Find items by function or menu name.

The Q&A Index

Know what you want to do but don’t know the function name? Find it from the

“question and answer” index.

➜

pp. 276–278

The Index

Search by key word.

➜

pp. 255–257

Error Messages

If a warning is displayed in the control panel, viewfinder, or monitor, find the solution

here.

➜

pp. 250–254

Troubleshooting

Camera behaving unexpectedly? Find the solution here.

A For Your Safety

Before using the camera for the first time, read the safety instructions in “For Your Safety”

(pg. xiv).

Help

Use the camera’s on-board help feature for help on menu items and other topics. See page 21

for details.

Digitutor

“Digitutor”, a series of “watch and learn” manuals in movie form, is available from the following

website: http://www.nikondigitutor.com/index_eng.html

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Package Contents

Be sure all items listed here were included with your camera. Memory cards are sold

separately.

❏ D90 digital camera ❏ Body cap

❏ BM-10 LCD monitor ❏ DK-5 eyepiece cap

(pg. 3)

(pp. 3, 240)

cover (pg. 17)

(pg. 17)

❏ EN-EL3e

❏ MH-18a quick

charger with power

cable (pg. 22)

❏ AN-DC1 strap

(pg. 17)

❏ BS-1accessoryshoe

cover (pg. 233)

rechargeable

Li-ion battery with

terminal cover

(pp. 22, 23)

❏ EG-D2 audio/video ❏ UC-E4 USB cable

cable (pg. 146) (pp. 149, 151)

❏ Warranty

❏ User’s Manual (this guide)

❏ Quick Guide (a guide for first-time users describing the basic steps involved in such tasks

taking pictures, copying pictures to a computer, and printing pictures)

❏ Software Installation Guide

❏ Software Suite CD-ROM

❏ Registration card (U. S. A. only)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Symbols and Conventions

To make it easier to find the information you need, the following symbols and

conventions are used:

This icon marks cautions; information that should be read before use to

prevent damage to the camera.

This icon marks notes; information that should be read before using the

camera.

A ^{Trademark Information}

Macintosh, Mac OS, and QuickTime are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. Microsoft,

Windows and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks, or trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. The SD logo is a trademark of the SD

Card Association. PictBridge and the SDHC logo are trademarks. HDMI, the HDMI logo and

High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI

Licensing LLC. All other trade names mentioned in this manual or the other documentation

provided with your Nikon product are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective

holders.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Introduction

Basic Photography and Playback

More on Playback

127

Full-Frame Playback............................................................................................................. 128

Photo Information................................................................................................................129

Thumbnail Playback ............................................................................................................ 135

Calendar Playback................................................................................................................ 136

Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom........................................................................... 138

Protecting Photographs from Deletion........................................................................ 139

Deleting Individual Photographs ................................................................................... 140

Pictmotion............................................................................................................................... 141

Slide Shows............................................................................................................................. 143

Connections

145

Viewing Photographs on TV............................................................................................. 146

Standard Definition Devices.............................................................................................146

High-Definition Devices.....................................................................................................147

Connecting to a Computer ............................................................................................... 148

Before Connecting the Camera.......................................................................................148

Connecting the Camera.....................................................................................................149

Printing Photographs.......................................................................................................... 150

Menu Guide

159

D The Playback Menu: Managing Images.................................................................. 160

Selecting Multiple Pictures ...............................................................................................160

Delete...................................................................................................................................162

Playback Folder.................................................................................................................162

Hide Image .........................................................................................................................162

Display Mode.....................................................................................................................163

Image Review ....................................................................................................................163

Rotate Tall...........................................................................................................................163

Pictmotion..........................................................................................................................163

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Slide Show.......................................................................................................................... 164

Print Set (DPOF) ............................................................................................................... 164

C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options.................................................................. 165

Set Picture Control.......................................................................................................... 165

Manage Picture Control................................................................................................ 165

Image Quality ................................................................................................................... 165

Image Size.......................................................................................................................... 165

White Balance................................................................................................................... 165

ISO Sensitivity Settings.................................................................................................. 166

Active D-Lighting ............................................................................................................ 166

Color Space........................................................................................................................ 167

Long Exp. NR (Long Exposure Noise Reduction) ................................................. 167

High ISO NR ....................................................................................................................... 168

Active Folder..................................................................................................................... 169

Multiple Exposure ........................................................................................................... 170

Movie setting.................................................................................................................... 170

A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings.................................................. 171

A: Reset Custom Settings ............................................................................................ 172

a: Autofocus ........................................................................................................................... 173

a1: AF-area Mode............................................................................................................. 173

a2: Center Focus Point................................................................................................... 174

a3: Built-in AF-assist Illuminator................................................................................. 174

a4: AF Point Illumination .............................................................................................. 175

a5: Focus Point Wrap-Around..................................................................................... 175

a6: AE-L/AF-L for MB-D80............................................................................................. 176

a7: Live View Autofocus................................................................................................ 176

b: Metering/Exposure......................................................................................................... 177

b1: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl.................................................................................. 177

b2: Easy Exposure Compensation ............................................................................. 177

b3: Center-Weighted Area ........................................................................................... 178

b4: Fine Tune Optimal Exposure................................................................................ 178

c: Timers/AE Lock ................................................................................................................. 179

c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L ................................................................................ 179

c2: Auto Meter-off Delay............................................................................................... 179

c3: Self-Timer..................................................................................................................... 179

c4: Monitor off Delay...................................................................................................... 180

c5: Remote on Duration................................................................................................ 180

d: Shooting/Display............................................................................................................. 180

d1: Beep.............................................................................................................................. 180

d2: Viewfinder Grid Display ......................................................................................... 181

d3: ISO Display and Adjustment................................................................................ 181

d4: Viewfinder Warning Display................................................................................. 181

d5: Screen Tips.................................................................................................................. 182

d6: CL Mode Shooting Speed ..................................................................................... 182

d7: File Number Sequence........................................................................................... 182

d8: Shooting Info Display ............................................................................................. 183

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

d9: LCD Illumination .......................................................................................................183

d10: Exposure Delay Mode...........................................................................................183

d11: Flash Warning..........................................................................................................183

d12: MB-D80 Battery Type............................................................................................184

e: Bracketing/Flash...............................................................................................................185

e1: Flash Shutter Speed .................................................................................................185

e2: Flash Cntrl for Built-in Flash ..................................................................................185

e3: Modeling Flash...........................................................................................................191

e4: Auto Bracketing Set .................................................................................................191

e5: Auto FP .........................................................................................................................195

e6: Bracketing Order .......................................................................................................195

f: Controls ................................................................................................................................196

f1: D Switch.......................................................................................................................196

f2: OK Button (Shooting Mode)...................................................................................196

f3: Assign FUNC. Button.................................................................................................197

f4: Assign AE-L/AF-L Button .........................................................................................200

f5: Customize Command Dials....................................................................................201

f6: No Memory Card? ......................................................................................................201

f7: Reverse Indicators......................................................................................................201

B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup.................................................................................. 202

Format Memory Card .....................................................................................................202

LCD Brightness..................................................................................................................202

Clean Image Sensor.........................................................................................................203

Lock Mirror up for Cleaning .........................................................................................203

Video Mode........................................................................................................................203

HDMI.....................................................................................................................................203

World Time.........................................................................................................................204

Language ............................................................................................................................204

Image Comment ..............................................................................................................205

Auto Image Rotation ......................................................................................................205

Image Dust off Ref Photo..............................................................................................206

Battery Info.........................................................................................................................208

GPS ........................................................................................................................................208

Eye-Fi Upload ....................................................................................................................208

Firmware Version .............................................................................................................208

N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies ................................................ 209

Creating Retouched Copies..............................................................................................210

D-Lighting...........................................................................................................................212

Red-Eye Correction..........................................................................................................212

Trim.......................................................................................................................................213

Monochrome.....................................................................................................................214

Filter Effects........................................................................................................................215

Color Balance.....................................................................................................................216

Small Picture......................................................................................................................216

Image Overlay ...................................................................................................................218

NEF (RAW) Processing ....................................................................................................220

Quick Retouch...................................................................................................................221

xii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Straighten .......................................................................................................................... 221

Distortion Control ........................................................................................................... 222

Fisheye ................................................................................................................................ 222

Side-by-Side Comparison............................................................................................. 223

m Recent Settings/O My Menu ....................................................................................... 224

m Recent Settings: Viewing Recent Settings............................................................. 224

O My Menu: Creating a Custom Menu ........................................................................ 225

Technical Notes

227

Compatible Lenses............................................................................................................... 228

Compatible CPU Lenses .................................................................................................... 229

Non-CPU Lenses................................................................................................................... 230

Optional Flash Units (Speedlights)................................................................................. 233

The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS) ................................................................. 233

Flash Contacts....................................................................................................................... 238

Other Accessories ................................................................................................................. 239

Caring for the Camera......................................................................................................... 243

Storage..................................................................................................................................... 243

Cleaning .................................................................................................................................. 243

The Low-Pass Filter.............................................................................................................. 244

Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions............................................................. 248

Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................... 250

Display ..................................................................................................................................... 250

Shooting (All Modes).......................................................................................................... 251

Shooting (i, j, k, l, m, n, and o modes) ............................................................. 252

Shooting (P, S, A, M)........................................................................................................... 252

Playback .................................................................................................................................. 253

Miscellaneous........................................................................................................................ 254

Error Messages....................................................................................................................... 255

Appendix ................................................................................................................................. 258

Available Settings and Defaults...................................................................................... 258

Memory Card Capacity ...................................................................................................... 262

Exposure Program............................................................................................................... 263

Bracketing Programs .......................................................................................................... 264

Flash Control.......................................................................................................................... 265

Shutter Speeds Available with the Built-in Flash ..................................................... 265

Aperture, Sensitivity, and Flash Range......................................................................... 266

Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 267

Index.......................................................................................................................................... 276

xiii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

For Your Safety

To prevent damage to your Nikon product or injury to yourself or to others, read the following

safety precautions in their entirety before using this equipment. Keep these safety instructions

where all those who use the product will read them.

The consequences that could result from failure to observe the precautions listed in this

section are indicated by the following symbol:

This icon marks warnings. To prevent possible injury, read all warnings before using

this Nikon product.

❚❚WARNINGS

Keep the sun out of the frame

Do not disassemble

Keep the sun well out of the frame when

shooting backlit subjects. Sunlight

focused into the camera when the sun is

in or close to the frame could cause a fire.

Touching the product’s internal parts

could result in injury. In the event of

malfunction, the product should be

repaired only by a qualified technician.

Should the product break open as the

result of a fall or other accident, remove

the battery and/or AC adapter and then

take the product to a Nikon-authorized

service center for inspection.

Do not look at the sun through the viewfinder

Viewing the sun or other strong light

source through the viewfinder could

cause permanent visual impairment.

Using the viewfinder diopter control

Do not use in the presence of flammable gas

Do not use electronic equipment in the

presence of flammable gas, as this could

result in explosion or fire.

When operating the viewfinder diopter

control with your eye to the viewfinder,

care should be taken not to put your

finger in your eye accidentally.

Keep out of reach of children

Failure to observe this precaution could

result in injury.

Turn off immediately in the event of malfunction

Should you notice smoke or an unusual

smell coming from the equipment or AC

adapter (available separately), unplug

the AC adapter and remove the battery

immediately, taking care to avoid burns.

Continued operation could result in

injury. After removing the battery, take

the equipment to a Nikon-authorized

service center for inspection.

Do not place the strap around the neck of an

infant or child

Placing the camera strap around the neck

of an infant or child could result in

strangulation.

Observe caution when using the flash

• Using the camera with the flash in close

contact with the skin or other objects

could cause burns.

• Using the flash close to the subject’s

eyes could cause temporary visual

impairment. Particular care should be

observed when photographing infants,

when the flash should be no less than

one meter (39 in.) from the subject.

xiv

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Observe proper precautions when handling

batteries

Observe proper precautions when handling the

quick charger

Batteries may leak or explode if

improperly handled. Observe the

following precautions when handling

batteries for use in this product:

• Use only batteries approved for use in

this equipment.

• Do not short or disassemble the battery.

• Be sure the product is off before

replacing the battery. If you are using

an AC adapter, be sure it is unplugged.

• Do not attempt to insert the battery

upside down or backwards.

• Keep dry. Failure to observe this

precaution could result in fire or electric

shock.

• Dust on or near the metal parts of the

plug should be removed with a dry

cloth. Continued use could result in fire.

• Do not handle the power cable or go

near the charger during thunderstorms.

Failure to observe this precaution could

result in electric shock.

• Do not damage, modify, or forcibly tug

or bend the power cable. Do not place

it under heavy objects or expose it to

heat or flame. Should the insulation be

damaged and the wires become

exposed, take the power cable to a

Nikon-authorized service

representative for inspection. Failure to

observe this precaution could result in

fire or electric shock.

• Do not expose the battery to flame or to

excessive heat.

• Do not immerse in or expose to water.

• Replace the terminal cover when

transporting the battery. Do not

transport or store the battery with

metal objects such as necklaces or

hairpins.

• Batteries are prone to leakage when

fully discharged. To avoid damage to

the product, be sure to remove the

battery when no charge remains.

• When the battery is not in use, attach

the terminal cover and store in a cool,

dry place.

• The battery may be hot immediately

after use or when the product has been

used on battery power for an extended

period. Before removing the battery

turn the camera off and allow the

battery to cool.

• Do not handle the plug or charger with

wet hands. Failure to observe this

precaution could result in electric

shock.

Use appropriate cables

When connecting cables to the input and

output jacks, use only the cables

provided or sold by Nikon for the

purpose to maintain compliance with

product regulations.

CD-ROMs

CD-ROMs containing software or

manuals should not be played back on

audio CD equipment. Playing CD-ROMs

on an audio CD player could cause

hearing loss or damage the equipment.

• Discontinue use immediately should

you notice any changes in the battery,

such as discoloration or deformation.

Avoid contact with liquid crystal

Should the monitor break, care should be

taken to avoid injury due to broken glass

and to prevent the liquid crystal from the

monitor touching the skin or entering

the eyes or mouth.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Notices

• No part of the manuals included with this

product may be reproduced, transmitted,

transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or

translated into any language in any form,

by any means, without Nikon’s prior

written permission.

• Nikon will not be held liable for any

damages resulting from the use of this

product.

• While every effort has been made to

ensure that the information in these

manuals is accurate and complete, we

would appreciate it were you to bring any

errors or omissions to the attention of the

Nikon representative in your area (address

provided separately).

• Nikon reserves the right to change the

specifications of the hardware and

software described in these manuals at

any time and without prior notice.

Notices for Customers in the U.S.A.

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Radio Frequency Interference Statement

This equipment has been tested and found

to comply with the limits for a Class B digital

device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules.

These limits are designed to provide

reasonable protection against harmful

interference in a residential installation. This

equipment generates, uses, and can radiate

radio frequency energy and, if not installed

and used in accordance with the instructions,

may cause harmful interference to radio

communications. However, there is no

guarantee that interference will not occur in

a particular installation. If this equipment

does cause harmful interference to radio or

television reception, which can be

determined by turning the equipment off

and on, the user is encouraged to try to

correct the interference by one or more of

the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the

equipment and receiver.

CAUTIONS

Modifications

The FCC requires the user be notified that any

changes or modifications made to this device

that are not expressly approved by Nikon

Corporation may void the user’s authority to

operate the equipment.

Interface Cables

Use the interface cables sold or provided by

Nikon for your equipment. Using other

interface cables may exceed the limits of

Class B Part 15 of the FCC rules.

Notice for Customers in the State of California

WARNING: Handling the cord on this product

may expose you to lead, a chemical known to

the State of California to cause birth defects

or other reproductive harm. Wash hands

after handling.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a

circuit different from that to which the

receiver is connected.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced

radio/television technician for help.

Nikon Inc., 1300 Walt Whitman Road,

Melville, New York 11747-3064, U.S.A.

Tel.: 631-547-4200

xvi

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Notices for Customers in Canada

CAUTION

ATTENTION

This Class B digital apparatus complies with

Canadian ICES-003.

Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est

conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

Symbol for Separate Collection in European Countries

This symbol indicates that this product is to be collected separately.

The following apply only to users in European countries:

• This product is designated for separate collection at an appropriate collection

point. Do not dispose of as household waste.

• For more information, contact the retailer or the local authorities in charge of

waste management.

Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction

Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally copied or reproduced

by means of a scanner, digital camera, or other device may be punishable by law.

•

Items prohibited by law from being copied or

•

Comply with copyright notices

reproduced

The copying or reproduction of

Do not copy or reproduce paper money,

coins, securities, government bonds, or

local government bonds, even if such

copies or reproductions are stamped

“Sample.”

copyrighted creative works such as books,

music, paintings, woodcuts, prints, maps,

drawings, movies, and photographs is

governed by national and international

the purpose of making illegal copies or to

infringe copyright laws.

The copying or reproduction of paper

money, coins, or securities which are

circulated in a foreign country is

prohibited.

Unless the prior permission of the

government has been obtained, the

copying or reproduction or unused

postage stamps or post cards issued by the

government is prohibited.

The copying or reproduction of stamps

issued by the government and of certified

documents stipulated by law is prohibited.

Cautions on certain copies and reproductions

The government has issued cautions on

copies or reproductions of securities

issued by private companies (shares, bills,

checks, gift certificates, etc.), commuter

passes, or coupon tickets, except when a

minimum of necessary copies are to be

provided for business use by a company.

Also, do not copy or reproduce passports

issued by the government, licenses issued

by public agencies and private groups, ID

cards, and tickets, such as passes and meal

coupons.

•

xvii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Disposing of Data Storage Devices

Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other data storage devices

does not completely erase the original image data. Deleted files can sometimes be recovered

from discarded storage devices using commercially available software, potentially resulting in

the malicious use of personal image data. Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user’s

responsibility.

Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another person, erase all

data using commercial deletion software, or format the device and then completely refill it

with images containing no private information (for example, pictures of empty sky). Be sure to

also replace any pictures selected for preset manual. Care should be taken to avoid injury

when physically destroying data storage devices.

Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories

Nikon cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex electronic circuitry.

Only Nikon brand electronic accessories (including battery chargers, batteries, AC adapters,

and flash accessories) certified by Nikon specifically for use with this Nikon digital camera are

engineered and proven to operate within the operational and safety requirements of this

electronic circuitry.

The use of non-Nikon electronic accessories could damage the camera and may

void your Nikon warranty. The use of third-party rechargeable Li-ion batteries not

bearing the Nikon holographic seal shown at right could interfere with normal

operation of the camera or result in the batteries overheating, igniting, rupturing, or leaking.

For more information about Nikon brand accessories, contact a local authorized Nikon dealer.

A ^{Before Taking Important Pictures}

Before taking pictures on important occasions (such as at weddings or before taking the

camera on a trip), take a test shot to ensure that the camera is functioning normally. Nikon will

not be held liable for damages or lost profits that may result from product malfunction.

A ^{Life-Long Learning}

As part of Nikon’s “Life-Long Learning” commitment to ongoing product support and

education, continually-updated information is available on-line at the following sites:

•

For users in the U.S.A.: http://www.nikonusa.com/

For users in Europe and Africa: http://www.europe-nikon.com/support

For users in Asia, Oceania, and the Middle East: http://www.nikon-asia.com/

Visit these sites to keep up-to-date with the latest product information, tips, answers to

frequently-asked questions (FAQs), and general advice on digital imaging and photography.

Additional information may be available from the Nikon representative in your area. See the

following URL for contact information: http://imaging.nikon.com/

xviii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Introduction

This chapter covers information you will need to know before using the camera,

including the names of camera parts, how to use the camera menus, and how to

ready the camera for use.

Overview.........................................................................................................................

Getting to Know the Camera.......................................................................................

The Camera Body........................................................................................................................

The Mode Dial ..............................................................................................................................

The Control Panel........................................................................................................................

The Viewfinder.............................................................................................................................

The Shooting Information Display........................................................................................ 10

The Command Dials................................................................................................................... 13

Attaching the AN-DC1 Camera Strap .................................................................................. 17

The BM-10 Monitor Cover........................................................................................................ 17

The DK-21 Viewfinder Eyepiece Cup.................................................................................... 17

Camera Menus ............................................................................................................... 18

Using Camera Menus................................................................................................................. 19

Help.................................................................................................................................................. 21

First Steps........................................................................................................................ 22

Charge the Battery ..................................................................................................................... 22

Insert the Battery ........................................................................................................................ 23

Attach a Lens ................................................................................................................................ 25

Basic Setup .................................................................................................................................... 27

Inserting Memory Cards........................................................................................................... 29

Adjust Viewfinder Focus........................................................................................................... 32

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Overview

Thank you for your purchase of a Nikon single-lens reflex (SLR) digital camera. To get

the most from your camera, please be sure to read all instructions thoroughly and

keep them where they will be read by all who use the product.

D ^{Use Only Nikon Brand Accessories}

Only Nikon brand accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use with your Nikon digital

camera are engineered and proven to operate within its operational and safety requirements.

THE USE OF NON-NIKON ACCESSORIES COULD DAMAGE YOUR CAMERA AND MAY VOID YOUR NIKON WARRANTY.

D ^{Servicing the Camera and Accessories}

The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing. Nikon recommends that the

camera be inspected by the original retailer or a Nikon-authorized service representative once

every one to two years, and that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that fees

apply to these services). Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly recommended if

the camera is used professionally. Any accessories regularly used with the camera, such as

lenses or optional flash units, should be included when the camera is inspected or serviced.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting to Know the Camera

Take a few moments to familiarize yourself with camera controls and displays. You

may find it helpful to bookmark this section and refer to it as you read through the

rest of the manual.

The Camera Body

1 Mode dial.............................................................6 13 Main command dial.......................................13

2 Eyelet for camera strap .................................17 14 AF-assist illuminator ................................... 174

Self-timer lamp................................................67

Red-eye reduction lamp ..............................71

15 Sub-command dial ........................................13

16 Fn button................................................197, 198

17 Depth-of-field preview button................. 82

18 Speaker

3 Focal plane mark (E) ....................................60

4 Accessory shoe (for optional flash

unit)................................................................233

5 Accessory shoe cover ................................. 233

6 Power switch ....................................................34

7 Shutter-release button..................................38

8 E (exposure compensation) button........90

19 Body cap ......................................................... 240

Two-button reset button .............................75 20 CPU contacts

9 Z (metering) button.....................................87 21 Mounting index...............................................25

Q (format) button.........................................30

10 I (release mode) button ............................64

11 AF (autofocus mode) button .......................54

Two-button reset button .............................75

12 Control panel......................................................7

22 Lens mount.......................................................60

23 Tripod socket

24 Battery-chamber cover.................................23

25 Battery-chamber cover latch......................23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The Camera Body (Continued)

1 Built-in flash......................................................70 9 Mirror.........................................................43, 246

2 M (flash mode) button...................................70 10 DC-IN connector for optional EH-5a or

Y (flash compensation) button...............91

EH-5 AC adapter ........................................239

3 Microphone.............................................50, 170 11 USB connector

Connecting to a computer ....................149

4 Infrared receiver..............................................69

5 D (bracketing) button .................................92

6 Connector cover ..............146, 147, 149, 151

7 Lens release button .......................................26

8 Focus-mode selector..............................54, 59

Connecting to a printer...........................151

12 HDMI mini-pin connector .........................147

13 Video connector ...........................................146

14 Accessory terminal ......................................241

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The Camera Body (Continued)

1 Viewfinder eyepiece ......................................32 9 X (playback zoom in) button................... 138

QUAL (image quality/size) button

2 DK-21 viewfinder eyepiece cup.................17

Image quality ................................................62

Image size.......................................................63

10 Diopter adjustment control........................32

3 O (delete) button

Deleting pictures .........................................49

Deleting pictures during playback..... 140

Q (format) button.........................................30 11 AE-L/AF-L button

Focus lock.......................................................57

Choosing role............................................. 200

Viewing pictures ..........................................50 12 a (live view) button

4 Monitor

Live view .........................................................43

Full-frame playback.................................. 128

5 K (playback) button ........................... 50, 128

6 G (menu) button.............................. 19, 159

7 L (help/protect) button.................. 21, 139

WB (white balance) button

White balance ...............................................95

Fine tuning white balance........................97

Color temperature.......................................99

8 W (thumbnail/playback zoom out)

button........................................................... 135

ISO (ISO sensitivity) button...........................74

Taking photographs ...................................43

Shooting movies..........................................50

13 Multi selector ...................................................19

14 J (OK) button..................................................19

15 Memory card slot cover................................29

16 Focus selector lock.........................................56

17 Memory card access lamp....................29, 39

18 R (information display/quick settings

display) button ......................................10, 12

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The Mode Dial

The camera offers a choice of the following eleven shooting modes:

❚❚P, S, A, and M Modes

Select these modes for full control over camera settings.

P—Programmed auto (pg. 80): Camera

chooses shutter speed and aperture, user

controls other settings.

A—Aperture-priority auto (pg. 82): Adjust

aperture to soften background details or

increase depth-of-field to bring both main

subject and background into focus.

S —Shutter-priority auto (pg. 81): Choose fast

shutter speeds to freeze action, slow shutter M —Manual (pg. 83): Match shutter speed

speeds to suggest motion by blurring

moving objects.

and aperture to your creative intent.

❚❚Auto Modes

Select these modes for simple, point-and-shoot

photography.

i Auto (pg. 34): Camera adjusts settings automati-

cally to produce optimal results with “point-and-

shoot” simplicity. Recommended for first-time

users of digital cameras.

j Auto (flash off) (pg. 34): As above, except that the

flash will not fire even when lighting is poor.

❚❚Scene Modes

Selecting a scene mode automatically optimizes settings to suit the selected

scene, making creative photography as simple as rotating the mode dial.

k Portrait (pg. 41): Shoot portraits with back- mSports (pg. 42): Freeze motion for dynamic

ground in soft focus.

sports shots.

l Landscape (pg. 41): Preserve details in

landscape shots.

o Night portrait (pg. 42): Shoot portraits

against a dimly-lit backdrop.

n Close up (pg. 42): Take vivid close-ups of

flowers, insects, and other small objects.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The Control Panel

1 Shutter speed

8 ISO sensitivity compensation indicator

ISO sensitivity................................................74

ISO display and adjustment.................. 181

9 “K” (appears when memory remains for

over 1000 exposures).................................35

10 “Beep” indicator ........................................... 180

11 GPS connection indicator......................... 124

12 Release mode...................................................64

13 Aperture (f-number)

Shutter-priority auto...................................81

Manual exposure mode ............................83

Exposure compensation value...................90

Flash compensation value...........................91

White balance fine-tuning...........................97

White balance color temperature.............99

White balance preset number................. 100

Number of shots in bracketing

sequence.........................................................92

2 Battery indicator..............................................34

3 Flash mode........................................................71

4 Image size..........................................................63

5 Image quality ...................................................62

6 White balance fine-tuning indicator........97

Aperture-priority auto ...............................82

Manual exposure mode ............................83

Bracketing increment

AE/flash bracketing.....................................92

White balance bracketing ..................... 191

Bracketing programs............................... 264

7 White balance ..................................................95 14 Color temperature..........................................99

A ^{Large-Capacity Memory Cards}

When enough memory remains on the memory card to record a

thousand or more pictures at current settings, the number of

exposures remaining will be shown in thousands, rounded down to

the nearest hundred (e.g., if there is room for 1,260 exposures, the

exposure count display will show 1.2 K).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The Control Panel (Continued)

15 Flash compensation indicator ...................91 23 ISO sensitivity indicator ............................... 74

Auto ISO sensitivity indicator...................166

Clock battery.................................................27 24 Bracketing progress indicator

16 “Clock not set” indicator

Warnings...................................................... 255

17 Flexible program indicator..........................80

18 Metering ............................................................87

19 Focus points .....................................................56

AF-area mode ............................................... 173

20 Autofocus mode .............................................54

21 Black-and-white indicator ........................ 181

22 Number of exposures remaining .............35

Number of shots remaining before

AE/flash bracketing .................................... 92

White balance bracketing ......................191

ADL bracketing ..........................................193

25 Bracketing indicator...................................... 92

26 White balance bracketing indicator ......191

27 Exposure compensation indicator........... 90

28 Multiple exposure indicator .....................121

memory buffer fills......................................65

Preset white balance recording

indicator....................................................... 101

Capture mode indicator............................ 148

ISO sensitivity

ISO sensitivity................................................74

ISO display and adjustment.................. 181

A ^{The LCD Illuminator}

Holding the power switch in the D position activates the

exposure meters and the control panel backlight (LCD

illuminator), allowing the display to be read in the dark.

After the power switch is released, the illuminator will

remain lit while the camera exposure meters are active (six

seconds at default settings) or until the shutter is released

or the power switch is rotated to D again.

Power switch

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The Viewfinder

910

13 14 16 17 18 19

1 Framing grid (displayed when On is

17 Number of exposures remaining .............35

Number of shots remaining before

selected for Custom Setting d2).......... 181

2 Reference circle for center-weighted

memory buffer fills......................................65

White balance recording indicator ....... 101

Exposure compensation value ..................90

Flash compensation value ..........................91

Capture mode indicator............................ 148

ISO sensitivity......................................... 74, 181

18 “K” (appears when memory remains for

over 1000 exposures).................................35

19 Flash-ready indicator.....................................42

20 Autoexposure (AE) lock indicator.............88

21 Electronic analog exposure display.........84

Exposure compensation..............................90

22 Flash compensation indicator ...................91

23 Exposure compensation indicator...........90

24 Auto ISO sensitivity indicator.................. 166

25 ISO sensitivity compensation indicator..74

metering .........................................................87

3 Battery indicator ^*...........................................34

4 Black-and-white indicator ^*...................... 181

5 Focus points...................................54, 173, 174

6 Center focus point (normal frame)........ 174

7 Center focus point (wide frame)............. 174

8 “No memory card” warning ^*................... 181

9 Focus indicator .........................................38, 60

10 Flash value (FV) lock indicator ................ 198

11 Shutter speed............................................81, 83

12 Aperture (f-number) ...............................82, 83

13 Battery indicator .............................................34

14 White balance bracketing indicator...... 191

15 Bracketing indicator ......................................92

16 ISO sensitivity indicator................................74

* Can be hidden with Custom Setting d4 (pg. 181).

D ^{The Viewfinder Display}

Owing to the characteristics of this type of viewfinder display, you may notice fine lines

radiating outward from the selected focus point. This is normal and does not indicate a

malfunction. If the battery is totally exhausted or not inserted, the display in the viewfinder

will dim. The viewfinder display will return to normal when a fully-charged battery is inserted.

D ^{The Control Panel and Viewfinder}

The response times and brightness of the control panel and viewfinder may vary with

temperature.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The Shooting Information Display

Shooting information, including shutter speed, aperture, the

number of exposures remaining, and AF-area mode, is

displayed in the monitor when the R button is pressed. Press

the R button again to change selected settings (pg. 12). To

clear shooting information from the monitor, press the R

button a third time or press the shutter-release button halfway.

At default settings, the monitor will turn off automatically if no

operations are performed for about 10 seconds.

R button

15 14

21 22 23 2425 26

A ^{See Also}

For information on choosing how long the monitor stays on, see Custom Setting c4 (Monitor

off delay, pg. 180). For information on changing the color of the lettering in the shooting

information display, see Custom Setting d8 (Shooting info display, pg. 183).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The Shooting Information Display (Continued)

1 Shooting mode

18 Metering ............................................................87

19 Flash mode........................................................71

Flash control mode for

optional flash units .................................. 233

20 Electronic analog exposure display .........84

Exposure compensation ..............................90

Bracketing progress indicator

AE/flash bracketing.....................................92

White balance bracketing ..................... 191

ADL bracketing.......................................... 193

21 AC adapter indicator .....................................34

22 Flash value (FV) lock indicator ................ 198

23 Flash compensation indicator....................91

24 Exposure compensation indicator ...........90

25 Multiple exposure indicator ...................... 121

26 Bracketing indicator

i auto/j auto (flash off).........................34

Scene modes.................................................41

P, S, A, and M modes......................................78

2 Flexible program indicator..........................80

3 Shutter speed

Shutter-priority auto...................................81

Manual exposure mode ............................83

Exposure compensation value...................90

Flash compensation value...........................91

Color temperature..........................................99

Number of shots in bracketing

sequence...............................................92, 191

4 Aperture (f-number)

Aperture priority auto................................82

Manual exposure mode ............................83

Bracketing increment

AE/flash bracketing.....................................92

White balance bracketing ..................... 191

ADL bracketing.......................................... 193

27 Active D-Lighting bracketing amount ... 193

28 Image comment indicator........................ 205

29 Autofocus mode .............................................54

30 ISO sensitivity......................................... 74, 181

31 Number of exposures remaining .............35

32 GPS connection indicator......................... 124

33 Auto-area AF indicator............................... 173

3D-tracking indicator................................. 173

Focus point .......................................................54

AF-area mode indicator............................. 173

34 Image size..........................................................63

35 Image quality ...................................................62

36 “Clock not set” indicator .................... 27, 255

37 Camera battery indicator.............................34

MB-D80 battery type display................... 184

MB-D80 battery indicator......................... 184

AE/flash bracketing.....................................92

White balance bracketing...................... 191

Bracketing programs............................... 264

5 Release mode...................................................64

6 Continuous shooting speed ............. 64, 182

7 Remote control mode indicator ................68

Self-timer mode indicator............................66

8 ISO sensitivity indicator................................74

Auto ISO sensitivity indicator .................. 166

9 “Beep” indicator............................................180

10 “K” (appears when memory remains for

over 1000 exposures) .................................35

11 White balance ..................................................95

White balance fine-tuning indicator........97

12 AE-L/AF-L button assignment..................... 200

13 Fn button assignment................................. 197

14 Picture Control indicator........................... 108

15 Active D-Lighting indicator ....................... 119

16 High ISO noise reduction indicator....... 168

17 Long exposure noise reduction

indicator....................................................... 167

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

❚❚Changing Settings in the Shooting Information Display (Quick Settings Display)

To change settings for the items listed below, press the R

button in the shooting information display. Highlight items

using the multi selector and press J to jump to the menu for

the highlighted item.

R button

1 Long exposure noise reduction ............. 167

2 High ISO noise reduction.......................... 168

Fn button assignment.................................197

AE-L/AF-L button assignment .....................200

3 Active D-Lighting ........................................ 119 7 Tip display.......................................................182

4 Picture Control.............................................. 108

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The Command Dials

The main- and sub-command dials are used alone or in combination with other

controls to adjust a variety of settings.

M button:

flash mode and

flash compensation

D button:

bracketing

Sub-command dial

Ebutton: exposure

compensation

I button: release mode

B button: autofocus mode

Main-command dial

Z button: metering

L (WB) button:

white balance

W (ISO) button:

ISO sensitivity

X (QUAL) button:

image quality/image size

❚❚Image Quality and Size

Set image quality (pg. 62).

X (QUAL) button Maincommand

Control panel

dial

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Choose an image size (pg. 63).

X (QUAL) button Sub-command

Control panel

dial

❚❚Autofocus Mode

Choose an autofocus mode

(pg. 54).

B button

Maincommand

dial

❚❚Release Mode

Choose a release mode

(pg. 64).

I button

Maincommand

dial

❚❚ISO Sensitivity

Set ISO sensitivity (pg. 74).

W ISO button

Main command

dial

❚❚Exposure

Choose a combination of

aperture and shutter speed

(exposure mode P; pg. 80).

Mode P

Main command

dial

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Choose a shutter speed

(exposure mode S or M; pp. 81,

83).

Mode S or M

Mode A or M

Z button

E button

Main command

dial

Control panel

Choose an aperture

(exposure mode A or M;

pp. 82, 83).

Sub-command

dial

Choose a metering method

(pg. 87).

Maincommand

dial

Set exposure compensation

(pg. 90).

Maincommand

dial

Activate or cancel bracketing/

select number of shots in

bracketing sequence (pp. 92,

191). Not displayed in ADL

bracketing (pg. 193).

D button

Maincommand

dial

Control panel

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Select bracketing exposure

increment (pg. 92, 192).

D button

Sub-command

dial

Control panel

❚❚White Balance

Choose a white balance

setting (pg. 95).

L (WB)

button

Main command

dial

Control panel

Fine-tune white balance (pg.

97), set color temperature

(pg. 99), or choose a white

balance preset (pg. 106).

L (WB)

button

Sub-command

dial

❚❚Flash Settings

Choose flash mode (pg. 71).

M button

Maincommand

dial

Control panel

Adjust flash compensation

(pg. 91).

M (Y) button Sub-command

dial

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Attaching the AN-DC1 Camera Strap

Attach the strap as shown below.

The BM-10 Monitor Cover

A clear plastic cover is provided with the camera to keep the

monitor clean and protect it when the camera is not in use. To

attach the cover, insert the projection on the top of the cover

into the matching indentation above the camera monitor (q)

and press the bottom of the cover until it clicks into place (w).

To remove the cover, hold the camera firmly and pull the

bottom of the cover gently outwards as shown at right.

The DK-21 Viewfinder Eyepiece Cup

Before attaching the DK-5 viewfinder eyepiece cap and other

viewfinder accessories (pg. 239), remove the viewfinder

eyepiece cup by placing your fingers underneath the flanges at

either side and sliding it off as shown at right.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Camera Menus

Most shooting, playback, and setup options can be accessed

from the camera menus. To view the menus, press the G

button.

G button

Tabs

Choose from playback, shooting,

Custom Settings, setup, retouch, and

recent settings menus (see below).

Slider shows position in

current menu.

Current settings

are shown by

icons.

If “Q” is displayed,

help for current item

can be viewed by

pressing L button

(pg. 21).

Menu options

Options in current menu.

The following menus are available:

D Playback

C Shooting

(pg. 160) Adjust playback settings and manage photos.

(pg. 165) Adjust shooting settings.

A Custom Settings (pg. 171) Personalize camera settings.

Setup

Retouch

(pg. 202) Format memory cards and perform basic camera setup.

(pg. 209) Create retouched copies of existing photographs.

Select from the twenty most recently used menu items. If

Recent settings (pg. 224) desired, a custom menu (“My Menu”) can be displayed in place

of Recent settings (pg. 224).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using Camera Menus

The multi selector and J button are used to navigate the camera menus.

J button

Select highlighted

item

Move cursor up

Select

Cancel and return

to previous menu

highlighted item

or display sub-

Move cursor down

Follow the steps below to navigate the menus.

G button

1 Display the menus.

Press the G button to display the menus.

2 Highlight the icon for the current menu.

Press 4to highlight the icon for the current

menu.

3 Select a menu.

Press 1or 3to position the cursor in the

selected menu.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 Position the cursor in the selected menu.

Press 2to position the cursor in the selected

menu.

5 Highlight a menu item.

Press 1or 3to highlight a menu item.

6 Display options.

Press 2to display options for the selected menu

item.

7 Highlight an option.

Press 1or 3to highlight an option.

8 Select the highlighted item.

Press J to select the highlighted item. To exit without

making a selection, press the G button.

Note the following:

• Menu items that are displayed in gray are not currently available.

• While pressing 2or the center of the multi selector generally has the same effect

as pressing J, there are some cases in which selection can only be made by

pressing J.

• To exit the menus and return to shooting mode, press the shutter-release button

halfway (pg. 35).

A ^{Using the Command Dials}

The main command dial can be used to move the cursor up and down, the sub-command dial

to move the cursor left and right. The sub-command dial can not be used to make a selection.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Help

If a Q icon is displayed at the bottom left corner of the monitor,

help can be displayed by pressing the L button. A

description of the currently selected option or menu will be

displayed while the button is pressed. Press 1or 3to scroll

through the display.

Q icon

L button

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

First Steps

Charge the Battery

The camera is powered by an EN-EL3e rechargeable Li-ion battery (supplied).

The EN-EL3e is not fully charged at shipment. To maximize shooting time, charge the

battery in the supplied MH-18a quick charger before use. About two and a quarter

hours are required to fully recharge the battery when no charge remains.

1 Plug the charger in.

Insert the AC adapter plug into the battery charger and

plug the power cable into an electrical outlet.

2 Remove the terminal cover.

-i

Remove the terminal cover from the battery.

3 Insert the battery.

Insert the battery into the charger. The CHARGE lamp will

blink while the battery charges.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 Remove the battery when charging is complete.

Charging is complete when the CHARGE lamp stops

blinking. Remove the battery and unplug the charger.

Insert the Battery

1 Turn the camera off.

Power switch

Always turn the camera off before inserting or

removing batteries.

2 Open the battery-chamber cover.

Open the battery-chamber cover on the bottom of the

camera.

3 Insert the battery.

Insert the battery as shown at right.

4 Close the battery-chamber cover.

❚❚Removing the Battery

Before removing the battery, turn the camera off. To prevent short-circuits, replace

the terminal cover when the battery is not in use.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

D ^{The Battery and Charger}

Read and follow the warnings and cautions on pages xiv–xv and 248–249 of this manual. Do not

use the battery at ambient temperatures below 0°C (32°F) or above 40°C (104°F). Charge the

battery indoors at ambient temperatures between 5–35°C (41–95°F); for best results, charge

the battery at temperatures above 20°C (68°F). Battery capacity may temporarily drop if the

battery is charged at low temperatures or used at a temperature below the temperature at

which it was charged. If the battery is charged at a temperature below 5°C (41°F), the battery

life indicator in the Battery info (pg. 208) display may show a temporary decrease.

The battery may be hot immediately after use. Wait for the battery to cool before recharging.

Use the charger with compatible batteries only. Unplug when not in use.

D ^{Incompatible Batteries}

This camera can not be used with EN-EL3 or EN-EL3a rechargeable Li-ion batteries for the

D100, D70 series, or D50 or with the MS-D70 CR2 battery holder.

A ^{EN-EL3e Rechargeable Li-ion Batteries}

The supplied EN-EL3e shares information with compatible devices, enabling the camera to

show battery charge state in six levels (pg. 34). The Battery info option in the setup menu

details battery charge, battery life, and the number of pictures taken since the battery was last

charged (pg. 208).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Attach a Lens

Care should be taken to prevent dust from entering the camera when the lens is

removed. An AF-S DX NIKKOR 18-105mm f/3.5-5.6G ED VR lens is used in this manual

for illustrative purposes.

Mounting index

Focal length index

Lens hood (pg. 273)

Focal length scale

CPU contacts (pg. 228)

Lens cap

Rear cover

Focus mode switch (pg. 25, 273)

VR (vibration reduction) switch

Focus ring (pg. 59, 273)

Zoom ring

1 Remove the rear lens cap and the camera body cap.

After confirming that the camera is off, remove the rear lens cap from the lens

and remove the camera body cap.

2 Attach the lens.

Keeping the mounting mark on the lens

aligned with the mounting mark on the

camera body, position the lens in the

Mounting

index

camera’s bayonet mount. Being careful

not to press the lens-release button,

rotate the lens counter-clockwise until it

clicks into place.

If the lens is equipped with an A-M or M/A-M switch,

select A (autofocus) or M/A (autofocus with manual

priority).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

❚❚Detaching the Lens

Be sure the camera is off when removing or exchanging lenses.

To remove the lens, press and hold the lens release button

while turning the lens clockwise. After removing the lens,

replace the lens cap, rear cover, and camera body cap.

❚❚Vibration Reduction (VR)

AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G VR lenses support vibration reduction

(VR), which reduces blur caused by camera shake even when the camera is panned,

allowing shutter speeds to be slowed by approximately 3 EV at a focal length of

105mm (Nikon measurements; effects vary with the user and shooting conditions).

To use vibration reduction, slide the VR switch to ON.

Vibration reduction is activated when the shutter-release

button is pressed halfway, reducing the effects of camera

shake on the image in the viewfinder and simplifying the

process of framing the subject and focusing in both

autofocus and manual modes. When the camera is panned,

vibration reduction applies only to motion that is not part of

the pan (if the camera is panned horizontally, for example,

vibration reduction will be applied only to vertical shake),

making it much easier to pan the camera smoothly in a wide

arc.

Vibration reduction can be turned off by sliding the VR switch to OFF. Turn vibration

reduction off when the camera is securely mounted on a tripod, but leave it on if the

tripod head is not secured or when using a monopod.

D ^{CPU Lenses with Aperture Rings}

In the case of CPU lenses equipped with an aperture ring (pg. 228), lock aperture at the

minimum setting (highest f-number). See the lens manual for details.

D ^{Vibration Reduction}

Do not turn the camera off or remove the lens while vibration reduction is in effect. If power to

the lens is cut while vibration reduction is on, the lens may rattle when shaken. This is not a

malfunction, and can be corrected by reattaching the lens and turning the camera on.

Vibration reduction is disabled while the built-in flash is charging. When vibration reduction is

active, the image in the viewfinder may be blurred after the shutter is released. This does not

indicate a malfunction.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Setup

A language-selection dialog will be displayed the first time the camera is turned on.

Choose a language and set the time and date. Note that if the time and date are not

set, B will blink in the monitor and the time and date recorded with photographs

will be incorrect.

1 Turn the camera on.

Power switch

A language-selection dialog will be displayed.

2 Select a language.

Press 1or 3to highlight the desired language and press

3 Choose a time zone.

A time-zone selection dialog will be displayed. Press 4or

2to highlight the local time zone (the UTC field shows

the difference between the selected time zone and

Coordinated Universal Time, or UTC, in hours) and press

4 Turn daylight saving time on or off.

Daylight saving time options will be displayed. Daylight

saving time is off by default; if daylight saving time is in

effect in the local time zone, press 1to highlight On and

press J.

5 Set the date and time.

The dialog shown at right will be displayed. Press 4or 2

to select an item, 1or 3to change. Press J when the

clock is set to the current date and time.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 Choose a date format.

Press 1or 3to choose the order in which the year,

month, and day will be displayed and press J.

7 Exit to shooting mode.

Press the shutter-release button halfway to exit to

shooting mode.

A ^{The Setup Menu}

Language and date/time settings can be changed at any time using the Language (pg. 204)

and World time (pg. 204) options in the setup menu.

A ^{The Clock Battery}

The camera clock is powered by an independent, rechargeable power source, which is charged

as necessary when the main battery is installed or the camera is powered by an optional EH-5a

or EH-5 AC adapter (pg. 239). Two days of charging will power the clock for about three

months. If the B icon flashes in the control panel, the clock battery is exhausted and the

clock has been reset. Set the clock to the correct time and date.

A ^{The Camera Clock}

The camera clock is less accurate than most watches and household clocks. Check the clock

regularly against more accurate time pieces and reset as necessary.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Inserting Memory Cards

The camera stores pictures on Secure Digital (SD) memory cards (available

separately).

1 Turn the camera off.

Power switch

Always turn the camera off before inserting or

removing memory cards.

2 Open the card slot cover.

Slide the card slot cover out (q) and open the card slot

(w).

3 Insert the memory card.

Holding the memory card as shown at right, slide it in

until it clicks into place. The memory card access lamp will

light for a few seconds. Close the memory card slot cover.

D ^{Inserting Memory Cards}

Front

Inserting memory cards upside down or backwards could

damage the camera or the card. Check to be sure the card is in

the correct orientation.

Access lamp

If C is displayed in the control panel as shown at right,

format the card as described on the following page.

D ^{The Access Lamp}

Do not remove the battery or disconnect the power source while the memory card access

lamp is lit. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the card.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

❚❚Formatting Memory Cards

Memory cards must be formatted after being used in other devices. Format the card

as described below.

D ^{Formatting Memory Cards}

Formatting memory cards permanently deletes any data they may contain. Be sure to copy any

photographs and other data you wish to keep to a computer before proceeding (pg. 148).

1 Turn the camera on.

Power switch

2 Press the Q buttons.

O button

Z button

Hold the Q (Z and O) buttons down

simultaneously for approximately two

seconds.

A blinking C will appear in the shutter-

speed displays in the control panel and

viewfinder. To exit without formatting the

memory card, wait six seconds (the default

setting) until C stops blinking or press any

button other than the Q (Z and O) buttons.

3 Press the Q buttons again.

Press the Q (Z and O) buttons together a second time while C is blinking

to format the memory card. Do not remove the memory card or remove or

disconnect the power source during formatting.

When formatting is complete, the control panel and

viewfinder will show the number of photographs that

can be recorded at current settings.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

❚❚Removing Memory Cards

After confirming that the access lamp is off, turn the camera off,

open the memory card slot cover, and press the card in to eject

it (q). The card can then be removed by hand (w).

D ^{Memory Cards}

• Memory cards may be hot after use. Observe due caution when removing memory cards

from the camera.

• Memory cards that have been formatted in a computer or other device must be reformatted

in the camera before they can be used for recording or playback.

• Turn the power off before inserting or removing memory cards. Do not remove memory

cards from the camera, turn the camera off, or remove or disconnect the power source

during formatting or while data are being recorded, deleted, or copied to a computer.

Failure to observe these precautions could result in loss of data or in damage to the camera

or card.

• Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects.

• Do not bend, drop, or subject to strong physical shocks.

• Do not apply force to the card casing. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the

card.

• Do not expose to water, heat, high levels of humidity, or direct sunlight.

A ^{No Memory Card}

If no memory card is inserted, the control panel and viewfinder will

show S and an icon will appear in the viewfinder as shown at

right. If the camera is turned off with a charged EN-EL3e battery and

no memory card inserted, S will be displayed in the control panel

and an icon will be displayed in the viewfinder.

A ^{The Write Protect Switch}

Memory cards are equipped with a write protect switch to

prevent accidental loss of data. When this switch is in the

“lock” position, photos can not be recorded or deleted and

the memory card can not be formatted. To unlock the

memory card, slide the switch to the “write” position.

Write-protect switch

A ^{See Also}

See page 202 for information on formatting memory cards using the Format memory card

option in the setup menu.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Adjust Viewfinder Focus

The camera is equipped with diopter adjustment to accommodate individual

differences in vision. Check that the display in the viewfinder is in focus before

framing pictures in the viewfinder.

1 Remove the lens cap and turn the camera Power switch

on.

2 Focus the viewfinder.

Rotate the diopter control until the viewfinder

display and focus point are in sharp focus.

When operating the diopter control with your

eye to the viewfinder, be careful not to put your

fingers or fingernails in your eye.

Focus point

A ^{Eyepiece Correction Lenses}

Corrective lenses (available separately; pg. 239) can be used to further adjust viewfinder

diopter.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Photography and Playback

This chapter outlines the basics of taking and viewing photographs in auto and scene

modes. It assumes that default camera settings are used; for information on restoring

default settings, see page 258.

“Point-and-Shoot” Photography (i and j Modes)............................................... 34

Step 1: Turn the Camera On .................................................................................................... 34

Step 2: Choose Shooting and Focus Modes...................................................................... 36

Step 3: Check Camera Settings .............................................................................................. 36

Step 4: Frame the Photograph ............................................................................................... 37

Step 5: Focus................................................................................................................................. 38

Step 6: Shoot................................................................................................................................. 39

Creative Photography (Scene Modes)....................................................................... 41

k Portrait ....................................................................................................................................... 41

l Landscape................................................................................................................................. 41

n Close Up .................................................................................................................................... 42

m Sports ......................................................................................................................................... 42

o Night Portrait........................................................................................................................... 42

Framing Pictures in the Monitor (Live View) ............................................................ 43

Basic Playback................................................................................................................ 48

Deleting Unwanted Photographs......................................................................................... 49

Recording and Viewing Movies (Live View).............................................................. 50

A ^{Use a CPU Lens}

Auto and scene modes are only available with CPU lenses. If these modes are selected when a

non-CPU lens is attached, the shutter release will be disabled.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

“Point-and-Shoot”Photography

(i and j Modes)

This section describes how to take photographs in i (auto) mode, an

automatic “point-and-shoot” mode in which the majority of settings

are controlled by the camera in response to shooting conditions, and

in which the flash will fire automatically if the subject is poorly lit. To

take photographs with the flash off while leaving the camera in

control of other settings, rotate the mode dial to j to select auto

(flash off) mode.

Step 1: Turn the Camera On

1 Turn the camera on.

Power switch

Remove the lens cap and turn the camera on.

The control panel and viewfinder displays will

light.

2 Check the battery level.

Check the battery level in the viewfinder or control panel.

Control panel Viewfinder

Description

—

Battery fully charged.

—

Battery partially discharged.

Low battery. Ready fully-charged spare battery or prepare to

charge battery.

Battery exhausted; shutter release disabled. Charge or

(blinks)

(blinks) exchange battery.

Note: When camera is powered by optional EH-5a or EH-5 AC adapter, battery level is not

displayed; instead, a 9 icon appears in the shooting information display (pg. 10).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3 Check the number of exposures remaining.

The exposure count displays in the control panel and

viewfinder show the number of photographs that

can be stored on the memory card. Check the

number of exposures remaining.

If there is not enough memory to store additional

photographs at current settings, the display will flash

as shown at right. No further pictures can be taken

until the memory card has been replaced (pg. 31) or

photographs have been deleted (pp. 49, 162).

A ^{Large-Capacity Memory Cards}

When enough memory remains on the memory card to record a

thousand or more pictures at current settings, the number of

exposures remaining will be shown in thousands, rounded down

to the nearest hundred (e.g., if there is room for 1,260 exposures,

the exposure count display will show 1.2 K).

A ^{Auto Meter Off}

At default settings, the viewfinder and the shutter speed and aperture displays in the control

panel will turn off if no operations are performed for about six seconds (auto meter off),

reducing the drain on the battery. Press the shutter-release button halfway to reactivate the

display in the viewfinder (pg. 38).

6 s

Exposure meters on Exposure meters off

Exposure meters on

The length of time before the exposure meters turn off automatically can be adjusted using

Custom Setting c2 (Auto meter-off delay, pg. 179).

A ^{Camera Off Display}

If the camera is turned off with a battery and memory card inserted, the

frame count and number of exposures remaining will be displayed (some

memory cards may only display this information when the camera is on).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Step 2: Choose Shooting and Focus Modes

1 Select i or j mode.

Mode dial

To take photographs without the flash, rotate

the mode dial to j. Otherwise, rotate the mode

dial to i.

2 Select autofocus.

Focus-mode selector

Rotate the focus-mode selector to AF

(autofocus).

Step 3: Check Camera Settings

Check settings in the control panel. The default settings for i and j mode are listed

below.

Autofocus mode

AF-area mode

Release mode

Flash mode

Image size

Image quality

Option

Default

Description

Page

If the subject is poorly lit, the flash will pop up

automatically when the shutter-release button is

pressed halfway and fire when the picture is taken.

Flash mode

(i mode)

Flash mode

(j mode)

j (flash off)

Flash will not fire even when lighting is poor.

NORM

Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of

Image quality

Image size

(JPEG Normal) roughly 1 : 8. Ideal for snapshots.

L (Large)

Images are 4,288 × 2,848 pixels in size.

One picture is taken each time the shutter-release

Release mode

(Single frame) button is pressed.

The camera automatically selects single-servo

autofocus if the subject is stationary, continuous-

servo autofocus if the subject is in motion. No

picture will be taken if the camera is unable to

focus.

(Auto select)

Autofocus mode

AF-area mode

Auto-area

The camera automatically selects the focus point. 173

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Step 4: Frame the Photograph

1 Ready the camera.

When framing photographs in the viewfinder, hold the

handgrip in your right hand and cradle the camera body

or lens with your left. Keep your elbows propped lightly

against your torso for support and place one foot half a

pace ahead of the other to keep your upper body stable.

In j mode, shutter speeds slow when lighting is poor; use

of a tripod is recommended.

Hold the camera as shown at right when framing

photographs in portrait (tall) orientation.

For information on framing photographs in the monitor in live view mode, see

page 43.

2 Frame the photograph.

Frame a photograph in the viewfinder with the

main subject in at least one of the eleven focus

points.

Focus point

A ^{Using a Zoom Lens}

Use the zoom ring to zoom in on the subject so that it fills a

larger area of the frame, or zoom out to increase the area visible

in the final photograph (select longer focal lengths on the lens

focal length scale index to zoom in, shorter focal lengths to

zoom out).

Zoom in

Zoom ring

Zoom out

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Step 5: Focus

1 Press the shutter-release button halfway.

Press the shutter-release button halfway to focus. The camera will

select the focus points automatically. If the subject is poorly lit, the

flash may pop up and the AF-assist illuminator may light.

2 Check the indicators in the viewfinder.

When the focus operation is complete, the

selected focus points will be briefly highlighted, a

beep will sound, and the in-focus indicator (J) will

appear in the viewfinder. If the camera chooses

single-servo autofocus (pg. 54), focus will lock

while the shutter-release button is pressed

halfway.

In-focus

indicator

Buffer

capacity

In-focus indicator

Description

Subject in focus.

Camera unable to focus using

autofocus. See page 55.

J (blinks)

While the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the

number of exposures that can be stored in the memory

buffer (“t”; pg. 65) will be displayed in the viewfinder.

A ^{The Shutter-Release Button}

The camera has a two-stage shutter-release button. The camera focuses when the shutter-

release button is pressed halfway. To take the photograph, press the shutter-release button

the rest of the way down.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Step 6: Shoot

Smoothly press the shutter-release button the rest

of the way down to release the shutter and record

the photograph. The access lamp next to the

memory card slot cover will light. Do not eject the

memory card or remove or disconnect the power

source until the lamp has gone out and recording is

complete.

Access lamp

❚❚Turning the Camera Off

Turn the camera off when shooting is complete.

Power switch

A ^{Camera Off Display}

If the camera is turned off with a battery and memory card inserted, the

number of exposures remaining will be displayed in the control panel.

A ^{Auto (Flash off) Mode}

Choose this mode where flash photography is prohibited, when photographing infants, or to

capture natural lighting under low light conditions.

i mode

j mode

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

A ^{The Built-in Flash}

If additional lighting is required for correct exposure in i mode, the

built-in flash will pop up automatically when the shutter-release

button is pressed halfway. Flash range varies with aperture and ISO

sensitivity (pg. 266); remove lens hoods when using the flash. If the

flash is raised, photographs can only be taken when the flash-ready

indicator (M) is displayed. If the flash-ready indicator is not displayed,

the flash is charging; remove your finger briefly from the shutter-

release button and try again.

To save battery power when the flash is not in use, return it to its closed

position by pressing it gently downward till the latch clicks into place.

For more information on using the flash, see page 70.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Creative Photography (Scene Modes)

The camera offers a choice of six “scene” modes. Selecting a program

automatically optimizes settings to suit the selected scene, making

creative photography as easy as rotating the mode dial.

Mode

k Portrait

l Landscape

n Close up

m Sports

Description

For portraits.

For natural and man-made landscapes in daylight or at night.

For close up shots of flowers, insects, and other small objects.

For moving subjects.

oNight portrait For portraits taken under low light.

To take photographs in scene modes:

1 Select the desired mode.

Mode dial

Rotate the mode dial to select a scene mode.

2 Take photographs.

Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.

kPortrait

Use for portraits with soft, natural-looking skin tones. If the

subject is far from the background or a telephoto lens is used,

background details will be softened to lend the composition a

sense of depth.

lLandscape

Use for vivid landscape shots in daylight or at night. The built-

in flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off automatically. Use of

a tripod is recommended to prevent blur when lighting is

poor.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

nClose Up

Use for close-up shots of flowers, insects, and other small

objects (a macro lens can be used to focus at very close

ranges). The camera automatically focuses on the subject in

the center focus point. Use of a tripod is recommended to

prevent blur.

mSports

High shutter speeds freeze motion for dynamic sports shots in

which the main subject stands out clearly. The built-in flash

and AF-assist illuminator turn off automatically.

oNight Portrait

Use for a natural balance between the main subject and the

background in portraits taken under low light. Use of a tripod

is recommended to prevent blur.

A ^{Focus Point}

At default settings, the camera selects the focus point as follows:

• k, l, and o modes: The camera selects the focus point automatically.

• n mode: The camera focuses on the subject in the center focus point. Other focus points can

be selected with the multi selector (pg. 56).

• m mode: The camera focuses continuously while the shutter-release button is pressed

halfway, tracking the subject in the center focus point. If the subject leaves the center focus

point, the camera will continue to focus based on information from the other focus points.

The starting focus point can be selected with the multi selector (pg. 56).

The Built-in Flash

If additional lighting is required for correct exposure in k, n, or o mode, the built-in flash will

pop automatically when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Framing Pictures in the Monitor

(Live View)

Press the a button to frame pictures in the monitor.

1 Press the a button.

a button

The mirror will be raised and the view through the lens

will be displayed in the camera monitor. The subject will

no longer be visible in the viewfinder.

Item

Description

Page

34, 41,

Shooting mode

The mode currently selected with the mode dial.

The amount of time remaining before live view ends

automatically. Displayed if shooting will end in 30 s or less.

Indicates that movies can not be recorded.

The current autofocus mode.

The option currently selected for image size.

The option currently selected for image quality.

The option currently selected for white balance.

Time remaining

“No movie” icon

Autofocus mode

Image size

Image quality

White balance

Audio recording

indicator

Indicates whether sound is being recorded with movies.

The recording time remaining in movie mode.

170

Time remaining

(movie mode)

To adjust monitor brightness, press the K button during

live view.

Monitor brightness

A ^{Before Selecting Live View}

Note that metering can not be changed in live view mode. Choose a metering method before

selecting live view mode.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2 Choose an autofocus mode.

Press the B button and rotate the command

dial until one of the following autofocus modes

is displayed in the monitor (note that these

autofocus modes differ from those available in

other shooting modes):

B button Main command

dial

Mode

Description

The camera automatically detects

and focuses on portrait subjects

facing the camera. Use for portraits.

Use for hand-held shots of landscapes

Face

priority

xit

Wide area and other non-portrait subjects. The

(default) focus point can be selected using the

multi selector.

Monitor

Use for pin-point focus on a selected

spot in the frame. A tripod is

recommended.

Normal

area

3 Check the view in the monitor.

To magnify the view in the monitor and check focus, press the X button.

X button

Exit

Press X to zoom in up to a maximum of 6.7 ×, or press W to zoom out. While

the view through the lens is zoomed in, a navigation window will appear in a

gray frame at the bottom right corner of the display. Use the multi selector to

scroll to areas of the frame not visible in the monitor. Press the J button to

start recording (pg. 50).

A ^{Monitor Brightness}

Monitor brightness can be adjusted by pressing the K button while the view through the

monitor is displayed. Press 1or 3to adjust brightness (note that monitor brightness has no

effect on pictures taken in live view mode). To return to live view, release the K button.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 Choose the focus point.

Wide and normal area autofocus: Rotate the focus

selector lock to “J” and use the multi selector to

move the focus point to any point in the frame.

Return the focus selector lock to “L” when

selection is complete.

Focus selector lock

Exit

Focus point

Face-priority autofocus: A double yellow border will

be displayed when the camera detects a portrait

subject facing the camera (if multiple faces, up

to a maximum of five, are detected, the camera

will focus on the closest subject).

Exit

Manual focus: Use the multi selector to choose the

focus point for electronic rangefinding (pg. 59)

as described for wide and normal area

autofocus, above.

Focus point

5 Focus.

Autofocus: In wide and normal area autofocus, the

camera will focus while the shutter-release

button is pressed halfway. In face-priority

autofocus, the camera sets focus and exposure

for the face in the double yellow border while

the shutter-release button is pressed halfway; if

the camera can no longer detect the subject

(because, for example, the subject has looked

away), borders will no longer be displayed. The

focus point will blink green and the monitor

may brighten or darken while the camera

xit

focuses. If the camera is able to focus, the focus point will be displayed in green;

if the camera is unable to focus, the focus point will blink red. Note that pictures

can be taken even when the focus point blinks red, and that single-servo

autofocus is used regardless of the option selected for autofocus mode (pg. 54).

Check focus in the monitor before shooting.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Manual focus: Focus using the lens focusing ring.

6 Take the picture.

Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to take

pictures in the current release mode (pg. 64). The monitor will turn

off. When shooting is complete, the photograph will be displayed in the

monitor for 4 s or until the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. The

camera will then return to live view mode.

7 Exit live view mode.

Press the a button to exit live view mode.

D ^{Shooting in Live View Mode}

Although they will not appear in the final picture, banding or distortion may be visible in the

monitor under fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps or if the camera is panned

horizontally or an object moves at high speed through frame. Bright light sources may leave

after-images in the monitor when the camera is panned. Bright spots may also appear. When

shooting in live view mode, avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other strong light sources.

Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the camera’s internal circuitry.

The effects of aperture on depth of field can not be previewed in live view mode but are visible

in the final photograph.

Live view shooting ends automatically if the lens is removed.

Live view mode can be used for up to an hour. Note, however, that

when used in live view mode for extended periods, the temperature of

the camera’s internal circuits may rise, resulting in image noise and

unusual colors (the camera may also become noticeably warm, but this

does not indicated a malfunction). To prevent damage to the camera’s

Exit

internal circuits, live view shooting will end automatically before the

camera overheats. A count-down display will appear in the monitor

30 s before shooting ends. At high ambient temperatures, this display may appear

immediately when live view mode is selected.

To reduce blur when using a tripod, choose On for Custom Setting d10 (Exposure delay

mode).

A ^{Exposure Lock and Exposure Compensation}

Exposure can be locked by pressing the AE-L/AF-L button (pg. 88) or (in P, S, A, and M modes)

altered using exposure compensation (pg. 90). The effects of exposure compensation are

visible in the monitor during live view.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

D ^{Face-Priority AF}

The camera’s ability to detect faces depends on a variety of factors, including whether or not

the subject is facing the camera. The camera may be unable to detect subjects that are not

facing the camera or faces that are hidden by sunglasses or other obstructions or that take up

too much or too little of the frame. If no face is detected when the shutter-release button is

pressed halfway, the camera will focus on the subject in the center of the frame.

The camera will continue to focus until a face is detected or the shutter-release button is

pressed halfway. If a flashing double red border is displayed, the camera is unable to focus;

recompose the picture and try again.

D ^{Using Autofocus in Live View}

Autofocus is slower in live view. The camera may be unable to focus in the following situations:

• The subject contains lines parallel to the long edge of the frame

• The subject lacks contrast

• The subject in the focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting brightness, or the

subject is lit by spot lighting or by a neon sign or other light source that changes in

brightness

• A cross (star) filter or other special filter is used

• The subject appears smaller than the focus point

• The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns (e.g., windows in a skyscraper)

• The subject is moving

Note that the focus point may sometimes be displayed in green when the camera is unable to

focus.

Use an AF-S lens. The desired results may not be achieved with other lenses or teleconverters.

A ^{The Shooting Information Display}

To hide or display indicators in the monitor in live view mode, press the R button.

Exit

Framing guides

(zoom not available)

Shooting information

off

A ^HDMI

When the camera is attached to an HDMI video device, the

camera monitor will turn off and the video device will display

the view through the lens as shown at right.

Exit

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Playback

At default settings, photographs are automatically displayed for about 4 s after

shooting. If no photograph is displayed in the monitor, the most recent picture can

be viewed by pressing the K button.

1 Press the K button.

A photograph will be displayed in the monitor.

K button

2 View additional pictures.

Additional pictures can be displayed by

pressing 4or 2. To view additional information

on the current photograph, press 1and 3

(pg. 129).

1/12

KON

D90

To end playback and return to shooting mode,

press the shutter-release button halfway.

250 F11

200

35mm

AUTO 0,

100NCD90

0001. JPG

15 09/2008 10 15 29

NOR AL

4288x2^M848

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Deleting Unwanted Photographs

To delete the photograph currently displayed in the monitor, press the O button.

Note that photographs can not be recovered once deleted.

1 Display the photograph.

Display the photograph you wish to delete as described on the previous page.

K button

2 Delete the photograph.

Press the O button. A confirmation dialog will be displayed.

O button

Press the O button again to delete the image and return to playback. To exit

without deleting the picture, press K.

A ^Delete

To delete multiple images, use the Delete option in the playback menu (pg. 162).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Recording and Viewing Movies

(Live View)

Movies up to 2 GB in size can be recorded in live view mode. Before recording,

choose frame size and sound options in the Movie settings menu (pg. 170).

1 Press the a button.

a button

The mirror will be raised and the view through the lens

will be displayed in the camera monitor. The subject will

no longer be visible in the viewfinder.

D ^{The 0 Icon}

A 0 icon (pg. 43) will be displayed if there is insufficient space

on the memory card to record movies.

2 Focus.

Frame the opening shot and press the shutter-release button halfway to focus

on your subject.

3 Start recording.

Recording indicator

Press the J button to start recording (at default

settings, both video and sound be recorded; do

not cover the microphone on the front of the

camera during recording). The recording time

available is displayed in the monitor, together

with a recording indicator. Exposure can be

Time remaining

locked by pressing the AE-L/AF-L button (pg. 88)

or (in P, S, A, and M modes) altered using exposure compensation (pg. 90). Note

that camera will not focus if the shutter-release button is pressed halfway

during recording.

4 End recording.

To end recording, press the J button (to end

recording and take a still picture in the mode

currently selected with the mode dial, press the

Exit

shutter-release button all the way down).

Recording will end automatically when the

maximum size is reached or the memory card is full.

D ^{Maximum Size}

Movie files can be up to 2 GB in size. The maximum length is 5 min for movies with a

frame size of 1280 × 720, 20 min for other movies; note that depending on memory card

write speed, shooting may end before this length is reached.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

D ^{Recording Movies}

Banding or distortion may be visible in the monitor and in the final movie under fluorescent,

mercury vapor, or sodium lamps or if the camera is panned horizontally or an object moves at

high speed through frame. Bright light sources may leave after-images when the camera is

panned. Jagged edges, false colors, moiré, and bright spots may also appear. When recording

movies, avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other strong light sources. Failure to observe

this precaution could result in damage to the camera’s internal circuitry.

Recording ends automatically if the lens is removed.

Live view can be used to record movies for up to an hour. Note,

however, that when used in live view mode for extended periods, the

temperature of the camera’s internal circuits may rise, resulting in

image noise and unusual colors (the camera may also become

noticeably warm, but this does not indicated a malfunction). To

prevent damage to the camera’s internal circuits, recording will end

automatically before the camera overheats. A count-down display will

appear in the monitor 30 s before shooting ends. At high ambient temperatures, this display

may appear immediately when live view mode is selected.

Autofocus is not available when recording movies. Matrix metering is used regardless of the

metering method selected.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

❚❚Viewing Movies

Movies are indicated by a 1 icon in full-frame playback (pg. 128). The following

operations can be performed while a movie is displayed:

Movie

indicator

Time

remaining

Audio

indicator

Use

Description

Press J to start, pause, or resume playback.

Start/pause/

resume

Advance/

rewind

Press 4or 2to rewind or fast forward. While playback is

paused, press 4or 2to rewind or advance one frame.

Adjust volume

X/ W

Press X to increase volume, W to decrease.

Monitor will turn off. Photographs can be taken immediately.

See page 159 for more information.

Exit to shooting

mode

Display menus

Return to full-

frame playback

/K Press the selector up or press K to exit to full-frame playback.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

More on Photography (All Modes)

This and the following two chapters build on the Tutorial to cover more advanced

shooting and playback options.

Focus................................................................................................................................ 54

Autofocus....................................................................................................................................... 54

Focus Point Selection ................................................................................................................ 56

Focus Lock ..................................................................................................................................... 57

Manual Focus................................................................................................................................ 59

Image Quality and Size................................................................................................. 61

Image Quality............................................................................................................................... 62

Image Size...................................................................................................................................... 63

Release Mode ................................................................................................................. 64

Continuous Mode ....................................................................................................................... 65

Self-Timer Mode ($)................................................................................................................... 66

Using an Optional Remote Control (#) ................................................................................ 68

Using the Built-in Flash ................................................................................................ 70

Flash Mode .................................................................................................................................... 71

ISO Sensitivity ................................................................................................................ 74

Two-Button Reset.......................................................................................................... 75

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Focus

Focus can be adjusted automatically (see “Autofocus,” below) or manually (pg. 59).

The user can also select the focus point for automatic or manual focus (pg. 59) or use

focus lock to focus to recompose photographs after focusing (pg. 57).

Autofocus

When the focus mode selector is set to AF, the camera

focuses automatically when the shutter-release

button is pressed halfway. In single-point AF, a beep

will sound when the camera focuses. No beep will

sound when AF-A is selected in m (sports) mode or

when continuous-servo autofocus is used (note that

continuous-servo autofocus may be selected

Focus mode selector

automatically when shooting moving subjects in AF-A autofocus mode).

With lenses that offers A-M selection, select A when using autofocus. With lenses that

support M/A (autofocus with manual priority), select M/A. If the lens does not support

autofocus or the camera is unable to focus using autofocus, use manual focus

(pg. 59).

❚❚Autofocus Mode

The following autofocus modes are available when the focus mode selector is set to

AF:

Autofocus mode

Description

Camera automatically selects single-servo autofocus when

subject is stationary, continuous-servo autofocus when subject is

moving. Shutter can only be released if camera is able to focus.

For stationary subjects. Focus locks when shutter-release button

is pressed halfway. Shutter can only be released when in-focus

indicator is displayed.

Auto select

(default setting)

AF-A

AF-S Single-servo AF

For moving subjects. Camera focuses continuously while

AF-C Continuous-servo AF shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Photographs can be

taken even when in-focus indicator is not displayed.

To choose the autofocus mode, press the B button. The focus mode changes each

time the B button is pressed.

B button

Main command dial

Control panel

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

A ^{Getting Good Results with Autofocus}

Autofocus does not perform well under the conditions listed below. The shutter release may

be disabled if the camera is unable to focus under these conditions, or the in-focus indicator

(J) may be displayed and the camera may sound a beep, allowing the shutter to be released

even when the subject is not in focus. In these cases, rotate the focus mode selector to M and

use manual focus (pg. 59), or use focus lock (pg. 57) to focus on another subject at the same

distance and then recompose the photograph.

There is little or no contrast

between the subject and the

background.

Example: Subject is the same

color as the background.

The focus point contains

areas of sharply contrasting

brightness.

Example: Subject is half in

the shade.

The focus point contains

objects at different distances

from the camera.

Example: Subject is inside a

cage.

Background objects appear

larger than the subject.

Example: a building is in the

frame behind the subject.

The subject contains many

fine details.

Example: A field of flowers or

other subjects that are

small or lack variation in

brightness.

The subject is dominated by

regular geometric patterns.

Example: A row of windows

in a skyscraper.

D ^{The AF-Assist Illuminator}

AF-assist illuminator

If the subject is poorly lit, the AF-assist illuminator will light

automatically to assist the autofocus operation when the shutter-

release button is pressed halfway. The AF-assist illuminator will not

light in l, or m modes or if Off has been selected for Custom Setting

a3 (Built-in AF-assist illuminator; pg. 174). The illuminator has a

range of about 0.5–3.0 m (1 ft. 8 in.–9 ft. 10 in.); when using the

illuminator, use a lens with a focal length of 24–200 mm and remove

the lens hood.

A ^{See Also}

Custom Setting d1 (Beep; pg. 180) can be used to turn the beep speaker on or off.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Focus Point Selection

The camera offers a choice of eleven focus points that together cover a wide area of

the frame. At the default settings, the camera chooses the focus point automatically

or focuses on subject in the center focus point. The focus point can also be selected

manually to compose photographs with the main subject positioned almost

anywhere in the frame.

1 Choose single- or dynamic-area AF.

At default settings, the focus point is selected

automatically in i, j, k, l, o, P, S, A, and M modes. To

enable manual focus-point selection in these modes,

select Single point, Dynamic area, or 3D-tracking (11

points) for Custom Setting a1 (AF-area mode; pg. 173).

2 Set the focus selector lock to “J“.

Focus selector lock

Set the focus selector lock to the “J” position.

This allows the multi selector to be used to

select the focus point.

3 Select the focus point.

Use the multi selector to select the focus point

in the viewfinder or control panel while the

exposure meters are active (pg. 35). The focus

selector lock can be returned to the “L” (locked)

position following selection to prevent the

selected focus point from changing when the

multi selector is pressed.

A ^{See Also}

Custom Setting a1 (AF-area mode; pg. 173) controls how the camera selects the focus point.

Custom Setting a2 (Center focus point; pg. 174) controls the size of the center focus point.

Custom Setting a4 (AF point illumination; 175) controls whether the active focus point is

highlighted in the viewfinder.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Focus Lock

Focus lock can be used to change the composition after focusing, making it possible

to focus on a subject that will not be in a focus point in the final composition. It can

also be used when the autofocus system is unable to focus (pg. 55). Focus lock is

most effective when Single point, Dynamic area, or 3D-tracking (11 points) is

selected for Custom Setting a1 (AF-area mode; pg. 173).

1 Focus.

Position the subject in the selected focus point

and press the shutter-release button halfway to

initiate focus. Check that the in-focus indicator

(J) appears in the viewfinder.

2 Lock focus.

AF-A and AF-C autofocus modes (pg. 54): With the

shutter-release button pressed halfway (q),

press the AE-L/AF-L button (w) to lock both focus

and exposure (an AE-L icon will be displayed in

the viewfinder). Focus will remain locked while

the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed, even if you later

remove your finger from the shutter-release

button.

Shutter-release button

AE-L/AF-L button

AF-S autofocus mode (pg. 54): Focus will lock automatically when the in-focus

indicator appears, and remain locked until you remove your finger from the

shutter-release button. Focus can also be locked by pressing the AE-L/AF-L

button (see above).

3 Recompose the photograph and shoot.

Focus will remain locked between shots if you

keep the AE-L/AF-L button pressed (AF-A/AF-C) or

the shutter-release button pressed halfway

(AF-S), allowing several photographs in

succession to be taken at the same focus

setting.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Do not change the distance between the camera and the subject while focus lock is

in effect. If the subject moves, focus again at the new distance.

A ^{Continuous Mode (pg. 65)}

Use the AE-L/AF-L button to lock focus in continuous mode.

A ^{See Also}

Custom Setting f4 (Assign AE-L/AF-L Button; pg. 200) controls the behavior of the AE-L/AF-L

button.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Manual Focus

Manual focus is available for lenses that do not support autofocus (non-AF Nikkor

lenses) or when autofocus does not produce the desired results (pg. 55). To use

manual focus, set the camera focus-mode selector and/or the lens focus-mode

switch as follows:

•

AF-S lenses: Set the lens focus-mode switch to M.

•

AF lenses: Set the both the camera focus-mode

selector and the lens focus-mode switch to M.

Manual focus lenses: Set the camera focus-mode

switch to M.

Focus-mode selector

To focus manually, adjust the lens focusing ring until

the image displayed on the clear matte field in the

viewfinder is in focus. Photographs can be taken at

any time, even when the image is not in focus.

D ^{Using Manual Focus with AF Lenses}

Be sure the camera focus-mode selector is set to M when using manual focus with AF lenses.

Focusing manually with the focus-mode selector set to AF could damage the lens.

A ^{AF-S DX Nikkor 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G VR Lenses (pg. 273)}

Like other AF-S lenses, the AF-S DX Nikkor 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G VR lens used in this manual

for illustrative purposes can be used for manual focus simply by setting the lens focus-mode

switch to M.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

❚❚The Electronic Rangefinder

If the lens has a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster, the

viewfinder focus indicator can be used to confirm whether the

subject in the selected focus point is in focus (the focus point

can be selected from any of the 11 focus points). After

positioning the subject in the selected focus point, press the

shutter-release button halfway and rotate the lens focusing

ring until the in-focus indicator (I) is displayed. Note that with

the subjects listed on page 55, the in-focus indicator may

sometimes be displayed when the subject is not in focus;

confirm focus in the viewfinder before shooting.

A ^{Focal Plane Position}

To determine the distance between your subject and the

camera, measure from the focal plane mark on the camera

body. The distance between the lens mounting flange and

the focal plane is 46.5 mm (1.83 in.).

46.5mm

Focal plane mark

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Image Quality and Size

Together, image quality and size determine how much space each photograph

occupies on the memory card. Larger, higher quality images can be printed at larger

sizes but also require more memory, meaning that fewer such images can be stored

on the memory card.

Image Quality and Size

Large file size

JPEG fine

JPEG normal

JPEG basic

Small file size

Small<Image size >Large

Changes to image quality and size are reflected in the number of exposures

remaining as displayed in the control panel and viewfinder (pg. 35).

A ^{File Names}

Photographs are stored as image files with names of the form “DSC_nnnn.xxx,” where nnnn is a

four-digit number between 0001 and 9999 assigned automatically in ascending order by the

camera, and xxx is one of the following three letter extensions: “NEF” for NEF images or “JPG”

for JPEG images. The NEF and JPEG files recorded at a setting of “NEF+JPEG” have the same file

names but different extensions. Small copies created with the small picture option in the

retouch menu have file names beginning with “SSC_” and ending with the extension “.JPG”

(e.g., “SSC_0001.JPG”), while images recorded with the other options in the retouch menu have

file names beginning with “CSC” (e.g., “CSC_0001. JPG”). Images recorded at a Shooting menu

> Color space > Adobe RGB (pg. 167) have names that begin with an underscore (e.g.,

“_DSC0001.JPG”).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Image Quality

The camera supports the following image quality options (listed in descending order

by image quality and file size):

Option

File type

Description

Raw 12-bit data from the image sensor are saved directly to the memory

card. Choose for images that will be processed on a computer. JPEG

NEF (RAW)

NEF copies of NEF (RAW) images can be created using the NEF (RAW)

processing option in the retouch menu (pg. 220) or software such as

ViewNX (supplied) or Capture NX 2 (available separately; pg. 240).

Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 : 4 (fine image

quality).

JPEG fine

JPEG normal

(default)

Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 : 8 (normal

image quality).

JPEG

Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 : 16 (basic image

quality).

JPEG basic

NEF (RAW) +

JPEG fine

Two images are recorded: one NEF (RAW) image and one fine-quality

JPEG image.

NEF (RAW) + NEF/ Two images are recorded: one NEF (RAW) image and one normal-quality

JPEG normal JPEG JPEG image.

NEF (RAW) +

JPEG basic

Two images are recorded: one NEF (RAW) image and one basic-quality

JPEG image.

Image quality can be set by pressing the X (QUAL) button and rotating the main

command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the control panel. Image

quality can also be adjusted from the shooting menu (pg. 165).

X (QUAL) button Main command dial

Control panel

A ^{NEF (RAW) Images}

Note that the option selected for image size does not affect the size of NEF (RAW) images.

When opened in software such as Capture NX 2 (available separately) or ViewNX (supplied),

NEF (RAW) images have the dimensions given for large (L-size) images.

A ^{NEF (RAW)/NEF+JPEG}

When photographs taken at NEF (RAW) + JPEG Fine, NEF (RAW) + JPEG Normal, or NEF

(RAW) + JPEG Basic are viewed on the camera, only the JPEG image will be displayed. When

photographs taken at these settings are deleted, both NEF and JPEG images will be deleted.

White balance bracketing (pg. 191) is not available when an NEF (RAW) + JPEG option is

selected for image quality. Selecting an NEF (RAW) + JPEG option cancels white balance

bracketing.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Image Size

Image size is measured in pixels. The following options are available.

Image size

L (default)

Size (pixels)

Approximate size when printed at 200 dpi ^*

54.5 × 36.2 cm (21.4 × 14.2 in.)

40.8 × 27.1 cm (16.1 × 10.7 in.)

27.2 × 18.1 cm (10.7 × 7.1 in.)

4,288 × 2,848

3,216 × 2,136

2,144 × 1,424

* Approximate size when printed at 200 dpi. Print size in inches equals image size in pixels

divided by printer resolution in dots per inch (dpi; 1 inch = approximately 2.54 cm). Print

size decreases as printer resolution increases.

Image size can be set by pressing the X(QUAL) button and rotating the sub-command

dial until the desired setting is displayed in the control panel. Image size can also be

adjusted from the shooting menu (pg. 165).

X (QUAL) button

Sub-command dial

Control panel

Note that the option selected for image size does not affect the size of NEF (RAW)

images. When viewed on a computer, NEF images are 4,288 × 2,848 pixels in size.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Release Mode

Release mode determines how the camera takes photographs: one at a time, in a

continuous sequence, with a timed shutter-release delay, or with a remote control.

Mode

Description

Camera takes one photograph each time shutter-release button is

pressed. Access lamp will light while photo is recorded; next shot can

be taken immediately if enough space remains in memory buffer.

Camera records 1–4 frames per second while shutter-release button is

held down (pg. 65). ^*Frame rate can be chosen with Custom Setting d6

(CL mode shooting speed; pg. 182).

Single frame

Continuous low

speed

Continuous

high speed

Camera records up to 4.5 frames per second while shutter-release

button is held down (pg. 65). ^*

Use for self-portraits or to reduce blurring caused by camera shake

(pg. 66).

Delayed remote Optional ML-L3 remote control required. Use for self-portraits (pg. 68).

Self-timer

Optional ML-L3 remote control required. Use to reduce blurring

caused by remote camera shake (pg. 68).

Quick-response

* Average frame rate with an EN-EL3e battery, manual focus, manual or shutter-priority auto

exposure, a shutter speed of ¹/250 s or faster, other settings (with the exception of Custom

Setting d6 in the case of continuous low speed mode) at default values, and memory

remaining in memory buffer.

To choose the release mode, press the I button and rotate the main command dial

until the desired setting is displayed in the control panel.

Control panel

I button Main command dial

A ^{The Memory Buffer}

The camera is equipped with a memory buffer for temporary storage, allowing shooting to

continue while photographs are being saved to the memory card. Up to 100 photographs can

be taken in succession; note, however, that frame rate will drop when the buffer is full.

While photographs are being recorded to the memory card, the access lamp next to the

memory card slot will light. Depending on the number of the images in the buffer, recording

may take from a few seconds to a few minutes. Do not remove the memory card or remove or

disconnect the power source until the access lamp has gone out. If the camera is switched off

while data remain in the buffer, the power will not turn off until all images in the buffer have

been recorded. If the battery is exhausted while images remain in the buffer, the shutter

release will be disabled and the images transferred to the memory card.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Continuous Mode

To take pictures in ! (continuous low speed) and 9 (continuous high speed)

modes:

1 Select ! or 9 mode.

Press the I button and rotate the main command dial until the desired setting

is displayed in the control panel.

I button Main command dial

Control panel

2 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.

While the shutter-release button is pressed all the way down, pictures

will be taken at up to 4.5 fps in continuous high speed mode, or at the

frame rate selected for Custom Setting d6 (CL mode shooting speed, pg. 182)

in continuous low speed mode.

A ^{Buffer Size}

The approximate number of images that can be stored in the

memory buffer at current settings is shown in the exposure-count

displays in the viewfinder and control panel while the shutter-release

button is pressed. The illustration at right shows the display when

space remains in the buffer for about 21 pictures.

A ^{Auto Image Rotation}

The camera orientation recorded for the first shot applies to all images in the same burst, even

if the camera is rotated during shooting. See “Auto Image Rotation” (pg. 205).

A ^{See Also}

For information on the number of photographs that can be taken in a single burst, see page

262.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Self-Timer Mode ($)

The self-timer can be used to reduce camera shake or for self-portraits.

1 Mount the camera on a tripod.

Mount the camera on a tripod or place the camera on a stable, level surface.

2 Select $ mode.

Press the I button and rotate the main command dial until $ is displayed in

the control panel.

Main command dial

Control panel

I button

3 Frame the photograph.

Frame the photograph. Before taking a photograph with the flash in P, S, A, or M

modes (pg. 78), press the M button to raise the flash and wait for the M indicator

to be displayed in the viewfinder (pg. 70). The timer will stop if the flash is

raised after the timer has started.

D ^{Cover the Viewfinder}

After framing the photograph, remove the

viewfinder eyepiece cup and insert the

supplied DK-5 eyepiece cap as shown. This

prevents light entering via the viewfinder

interfering with exposure.

DK-5 eyepiece cap

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 Start the timer.

Press the shutter-release button halfway to

focus, and then press the button the rest of the

way down to start the self-timer. The self-timer

lamp will start to blink and a beep will begin to sound. Two seconds before the

photograph is taken, the self-timer lamp will stop blinking and the beeping will

become more rapid. At default settings, the shutter will be released ten

seconds after the timer starts.

The timer will not start if the camera is unable to focus or in other situations in

which the shutter can not be released.

The self-timer can be cancelled by selecting another release mode. Turning the

camera off cancels self-timer mode and restores single frame or continuous mode.

D ^Bulb

In self-timer mode, a shutter speed of A is equivalent to approximately ¹/10 s.

A ^{See Also}

For information on changing the timer duration and choosing the number of shots taken, see

Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer, pg. 179). For information on setting a beep to sound as the

timer counts down, see Custom Setting d1 (Beep, pg. 180).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using an Optional Remote Control (#)

Use the optional ML-L3 remote control for self-portraits (pg. 241) or to operate the

camera remotely.

D ^{Before Using the Remote Control}

Before using the remote control for the first time, remove the clear plastic battery insulator

sheet.

1 Mount the camera on a tripod.

Mount the camera on a tripod or place the camera on a stable, level surface.

2 Select " or # mode.

Press the I button and rotate the main command dial to select one of the

following modes:

Main command dial

Control panel

Description

I button

Mode

Shutter released about 2 s after remote shutter-release

button is pressed.

" Delayed remote

Shutter released when remote shutter-release button is

pressed.

Quick-response remote

The camera will enter stand-by mode. At default settings, single frame or

continuous mode will be restored if no operations are performed for about a

minute.

3 Frame the photograph.

Frame the photograph. If autofocus is in effect, the camera shutter-release

button can be used to set focus, although only the shutter-release button on

the remote control can be used to release the shutter.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DK-5 eyepiece cap

4 Cover the viewfinder

After framing the photograph,

remove the viewfinder eyepiece cup

and insert the supplied DK-5

eyepiece cap as shown. This

prevents light entering via the

viewfinder interfering with exposure.

5 Take the photograph.

Aim the transmitter on the ML-L3 at the infrared

receiver on the camera and press the shutter-release

button on the ML-L3. In delayed remote mode, the self-

timer lamp will light for about two seconds before the

shutter is released. In quick-response remote mode, the self-timer lamp will

flash after the shutter has been released. In AF-A or AF-S is selected in autofocus

modes (pg. 54), the camera will return to stand-by mode without releasing the

shutter if unable to focus. The camera will release the shutter without focusing

in manual focus mode, if AF-C is selected in autofocus mode, or if the camera has

already been focused using the camera shutter-release button (see step 3).

Remote control mode can be cancelled by selecting another release mode. Single-

frame or continuous mode will be restored if the camera is turned off or no

operations are about one minute.

D ^{Using the Built-in Flash}

If the flash is required, the camera will only respond to the shutter-release button on the ML-L3

once the flash has charged. In i, k, n, and o modes, the flash will begin charging when

delayed remote or quick-response remote mode is selected; once the flash is charged, it will

automatically pop up and fire if required when the shutter-release button on the ML-L3 is

pressed. In P, S, A, and M modes, raising the flash during the two-second count-down in delayed

remote mode will cancel the two-second timer. Wait for the flash to charge and then press the

shutter-release button on the ML-L3 to restart the timer.

In flash-sync modes that support red-eye reduction, the red-eye reduction lamp will light for

about one second before the shutter is released. In delayed remote mode, the self-timer lamp

will light for two seconds, followed by the red-eye reduction lamp, which lights for one second

before the shutter is released to reduce red-eye.

A ^{See Also}

For information on choosing the length of time the camera will remain in stand-by mode

before remote control mode is cancelled, see Custom Setting c5 (Remote on duration, pg.

180). For information on controlling the beeps that sound when the remote control is used,

see Custom Setting d1 (Beep, pg. 180).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using the Built-in Flash

The camera supports a variety of flash modes for photographing poorly lit or backlit

subjects.

❚❚Using the Built-in Flash: i, k, n, and oModes

1 Choose a shooting mode.

Rotate the mode dial to select the desired mode.

2 Choose a flash mode.

Press the M button and rotate until the desired flash mode is displayed in the

control panel (pg. 71).

3 Take pictures.

The flash will pop up as required when the

shutter-release button is pressed halfway, and

fire when a photograph is taken.

❚❚Using the Built-in Flash: P, S, A, and M Modes

1 Choose a shooting mode.

Rotate the mode dial to select the desired mode.

2 Raise the flash.

Press the M button to raise the flash.

M button

3 Choose a flash mode.

Press the M button and rotate until the desired flash mode is displayed in the

control panel (pg. 71).

4 Select a metering method and set exposure.

5 Take pictures.

The flash will fire whenever a picture is taken.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Flash Mode

Press the M button and rotate the main command dial until the desired flash mode is

displayed in the control panel.

M button

Main command dial

Control panel

The current flash mode is displayed in the control panel as shown below.

Y (red-eye reduction): Use for portraits. Red-eye reduction lamp lights

before flash fires, reducing “red-eye.”

j(off): Flash does not fire even when lighting is poor or subject is back-lit.

AUTO (auto flash): When lighting is poor or subject is back lit, flash pops up

automatically when shutter-release button is pressed halfway and fires as

required.

SLOW (slow sync): Shutter speed slows automatically to capture background

lighting at night or under low light. Use to include background lighting in

portraits.

REAR (rear-curtain sync): Flash fires just before shutter closes (see below). If

this icon is not displayed, flash will fire immediately after shutter opens.

A ^{Rear-Curtain Sync}

Normally the flash fires as the shutter opens (“front-curtain sync”; see below at left). In rear-

curtain sync, the flash fires just before the shutter closes, creating the effect of a stream of light

behind moving subjects.

Front-curtain sync

Rear-curtain sync

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The flash modes available depend on the mode currently selected with the mode

dial.

i, k, n

Auto

Auto+Slow sync

Auto+

red-eye

Slow sync+

red-eye

Off

reduction

P, A

S, M

Fill flash

Rear-

Red-eye

curtain+

slow sync ^*

reduction

Red-eye

Rear-

curtain

sync

reduction

Slow sync+

red-eye

Slow sync

reduction

SLOW is displayed after main M button is released.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

❚❚Lowering the Built-in Flash

To save power when the flash is not in use, press it gently

downward until the latch clicks into place.

A ^{The Built-in Flash}

Use with CPU lenses with focal lengths of 18–300 mm or non-CPU lenses with focal lengths of

18–200 mm (pg. 232; note that auto flash level control is available with CPU lenses only).

Remove lens hoods to prevent shadows. Lenses that block the subject’s view of the red-eye

reduction lamp may interfere with red-eye reduction. The flash has a minimum range of 60 cm

(2 ft.) and can not be used in the macro range of macro zoom lenses.

If the flash fires in ! or 9 mode (pg. 65), only one picture will be taken each time the

shutter-release button is pressed.

The shutter release may be briefly disabled to protect the flash after it has been used for several

consecutive shots. The flash can be used again after a short pause.

A ^{See Also}

See page 198 for information on locking flash value (FV) for a metered subject before

recomposing a photograph.

For information on choosing the slowest shutter speed available when using the flash, see

Custom Setting e1 (Flash shutter speed, pg. 185). For information on using the built-in flash

in commander mode, see Custom Setting e2 (Flash cntrl for built-in flash, pg. 185). For

information on previewing the effects of the flash, see Custom Setting e3 (Modeling flash, pg.

191).

See the Appendix for more about the built-in flash, including flash control (pg. 265), shutter

sync speeds (pg. 265), and range (pg. 266). For information on optional flash units, see pg. 233.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ISO Sensitivity

“ISO sensitivity” is the digital equivalent of film speed. The higher the ISO sensitivity,

the less light needed to make an exposure, allowing higher shutter speeds or smaller

apertures.

ISO sensitivity can be set between values roughly equivalent to ISO 200 and ISO 3200

in steps equivalent to ¹/3 EV. For special situations, ISO sensitivity can be lowered

below ISO 200 by about 0.3 EV (S, equivalent to ISO 160), 0.7 EV (T, equivalent

to ISO 125), or 1.0 EV (U, equivalent to ISO 100), or raised above ISO 3200 by about

0.3 EV (P, equivalent to ISO 4000), 0.7 EV (Q, equivalent to ISO 5000), or 1.0 EV

(R, equivalent to ISO 6400). Auto and scene modes also offer an AUTO option (the

default setting), which allows the camera to set ISO sensitivity automatically in

response to lighting conditions. 01 is displayed in the control panel and

viewfinder when AUTO is selected.

ISO sensitivity can be selected by pressing the W (ISO) button and rotating the main

command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the control panel. ISO

sensitivity can also be adjusted from the shooting menu (pg. 165).

W (ISO) button

Main command dial

Control panel

A ^AUTO

If the mode dial is rotated to P, S, A, or M after 01 is selected for ISO sensitivity in

another mode, the ISO sensitivity last selected in P, S, A, or M mode will be restored.

A ^{HI 0.3–HI 1}

Pictures taken at these settings are more likely to be subject to noise and color distortion.

A ^{See Also}

For information on enabling auto ISO sensitivity control in P, S, A, or M modes, see page 78. For

information on using the High ISO NR option in the shooting menu to reduce noise at high ISO

sensitivities, see page 165.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Two-Button Reset

The camera settings listed below can be restored to default

values by holding the E and B buttons down together for

more than two seconds (these buttons are marked by a green

dot). The control panel turns off briefly while settings are

reset. Custom Settings are not affected.

E button

B button

Option

Image quality (pg. 62)

Image size (pg. 63)

Release mode (pg. 64)

ISO sensitivity (pg. 74)

Auto and scene modes

P, S, A, M

Default

JPEG normal

Option

Focus point (pg. 56) ¹

Metering (pg. 87)

AE/AF lock hold (pp. 88, 200)

Flexible program (pg. 80)

Exposure compensation

(pg. 90)

Default

Center

Matrix

Off

Single frame

Off

AUTO

200

Off

Flash compensation (pg. 91)

Bracketing (pg. 92)

FV lock (pg. 198)

Off

Off ²

Off

White balance (pg. 95)

Fine tuning (pg. 97)

Color temperature (pg. 99)

Picture Control modifications

(pg. 110)

Autofocus mode (pg. 54)

Autofocus mode (live view)

k, o

Auto

5000 K

Flash mode (pg. 71)

None

AF-A

Auto front-

curtain sync

Auto slow

sync

Front curtain

sync

i, k, n

Face-priority

Wide area

Normal area

i, j, l, m, P, S, A, M

P, S, A, M

Multiple exposure (pg. 121)

Off

1 Focus point not displayed if Auto-area is selected for Custom Setting a1 (AF-area mode).

2 Number of shots reset to zero. Bracketing increment reset to 1 EV (exposure/flash

bracketing) or 1 (white balance bracketing).

A ^{Default Settings}

See pages 258–261 for a list of default settings.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P, S, A, and M Modes

P, S, A, and M modes offer control over a variety of advanced settings, including shutter

speed and aperture, metering, flash compensation, and white balance.

Shutter Speed and Aperture ....................................................................................... 78

Mode P (Programmed Auto)................................................................................................... 80

Mode S (Shutter-Priority Auto)............................................................................................... 81

Mode A (Aperture-Priority Auto)........................................................................................... 82

Mode M (Manual)........................................................................................................................ 83

Long Time-Exposures (M Mode Only) .............................................................................. 85

Exposure ......................................................................................................................... 87

Metering......................................................................................................................................... 87

Autoexposure Lock (P, S, and A Modes Only).................................................................... 88

Exposure Compensation .......................................................................................................... 90

Flash Compensation .................................................................................................................. 91

Exposure and Flash Bracketing.............................................................................................. 92

White Balance ................................................................................................................ 95

Fine-Tuning White Balance...................................................................................................... 97

Choosing a Color Temperature.............................................................................................. 99

Preset Manual............................................................................................................................... 100

Picture Controls ............................................................................................................. 108

Selecting Nikon Picture Controls .......................................................................................... 109

Modifying Existing Picture Controls..................................................................................... 110

Creating Custom Picture Controls ........................................................................................ 113

Sharing Custom Picture Controls.......................................................................................... 115

Managing Custom Picture Controls ..................................................................................... 117

Active D-Lighting .......................................................................................................... 119

Multiple Exposure ......................................................................................................... 121

The GP-1 GPS Unit ......................................................................................................... 124

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Shutter Speed and Aperture

P, S, A, and M modes offer different degrees of control over shutter

speed and aperture:

Mode

Description

Camera sets shutter speed and aperture for optimal exposure.

Recommended for snapshots and in other situations in which

there is little time to adjust camera settings.

Programmed auto

(pg. 80)

Shutter-priority auto User chooses shutter speed; camera selects aperture for best

(pg. 81)

results. Use to freeze or blur motion.

User chooses aperture; camera selects shutter speed for best

results. Use to blur background or bring both foreground and

background into focus.

Aperture-priority auto

(pg. 82)

User controls both shutter speed and aperture. Set shutter speed

to “A” or “&” for long time-exposures.

Manual (pg. 83)

D ^{Lens Aperture Rings}

When using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring (pg. 228), lock the aperture ring at the minimum

aperture (highest f-number). Type G lenses are not equipped with an aperture ring.

Non-CPU lenses can only be used in exposure mode M, when aperture can be adjusted manually

using the lens aperture ring (in other modes, the shutter-release will be disabled). The camera

exposure meter, auto ISO sensitivity control, and variety of other features can not be used (pg.

165).

A ^{See also}

Use the ISO sensitivity auto control option in the shooting menu (pg. 165) to enable auto

ISO sensitivity control in P, S, A, and M modes. Custom Setting b1 (EV steps for exposure cntrl.;

pg. 177) determines the size of the increments used for setting shutter speed and aperture.

Custom Setting f5 (Customize command dials; pg. 201) determines the roles played by the

main and sub-command dials in setting shutter speed and aperture.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

A ^{Shutter Speed and Aperture}

The same exposure can be achieved with different combinations of shutter speed and

aperture. Fast shutter speeds and larger apertures freeze moving objects and soften

background details, while slow shutter speeds and small apertures blur moving objects and

bring out background details.

Shutter speed

Aperture

Control panel

Fast shutter speed (¹/1,600 s)

Slow shutter speed (1 s)

Small aperture (f/36)

Large aperture (f/3)

(Remember, the larger the f-number, the smaller the aperture.)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mode P (Programmed Auto)

In this mode, the camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and aperture for

optimal exposure in most situations. This mode is recommended for snapshots and

other situations in which you want to leave the camera in charge of shutter speed

and aperture. To take photographs in programmed auto:

1 Rotate the mode dial to P.

Mode dial

2 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.

A ^{Flexible Program}

In mode P, different combinations of shutter speed and aperture can

be selected by rotating the main command dial (“flexible program”).

Rotate the main command dial to the right for large apertures (small f-

numbers) that blur background details or fast shutter speeds that

“freeze” motion. Rotate the main command dial to the left for small

apertures (large f-numbers) that increase depth of field or slow shutter

speeds that blur motion. All combinations produce the same

exposure. While flexible program is in effect, a U indicator appears in

the control panel. To restore default shutter speed and aperture

settings, rotate the main command dial until the indicator is no longer

displayed, choose another mode, or turn the camera off.

Main command

dial

A ^{See Also}

See page 263 for information on the built-in exposure program.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mode S (Shutter-Priority Auto)

In shutter-priority auto, you choose the shutter speed while the camera

automatically selects the aperture that will produce the optimal exposure. Use slow

shutter speeds to suggest motion by blurring moving subjects, high shutter speeds

to “freeze” motion. To take photographs in shutter-priority auto:

1 Rotate the mode dial to S.

Mode dial

2 Choose a shutter speed.

Press the shutter-release button

halfway to activate the exposure

meters and rotate the main command

dial to choose the desired shutter

speed from values between 30 s and

¹/4,000 s.

Main command

dial

3 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.

A ^{See Also}

See page 255 for information on what to do if flashing “A” or “&” indicators appear in

the shutter-speed displays.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mode A (Aperture-Priority Auto)

In aperture-priority auto, you choose the aperture to control depth of field (see

below) while the camera automatically selects the shutter speed that will produce

the optimal exposure. To take photographs in aperture-priority auto:

1 Rotate the mode dial to A.

Mode dial

2 Choose an aperture.

Press the shutter-release button

halfway to activate the exposure

meters and rotate the sub-command

dial to choose the desired aperture

from values between the minimum

and maximum for the lens.

Sub command

dial

3 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.

A ^{Depth of Field}

“Depth of field” is the distance to which objects behind and in front of the focus point appear

to be in focus. Large apertures (low f-numbers) reduce depth of field, blurring objects behind

and in front of the main subject. Small apertures (high f-numbers) increase depth of field,

bringing out details in the background and foreground (note that depth of field is also

influenced by other factors, such as focal length and focus distance). Short field depths are

generally used in portraits to blur background details, long field depths in landscape

photographs to bring the foreground and background into focus.

To preview depth of field, press and hold the depth-of-field preview

button. The lens will be stopped down to the current aperture value,

allowing depth of field to be previewed in the viewfinder.

Depth-of-field preview

button

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mode M (Manual)

In manual exposure mode, you control both shutter speed and aperture. To take

photographs in manual exposure mode:

1 Rotate the mode dial to M.

Mode dial

2 Choose aperture and shutter speed.

Checking exposure in the electronic analog exposure display (pg. 84), rotate the

main command dial to choose a shutter speed and the sub-command dial to

choose an aperture. Shutter speed can be set to values between 30 s and

¹/4,000 s, or the shutter can be held open indefinitely for a long time-exposure

(A or &, pg. 85). Aperture can be set to values between the minimum

and maximum for the lens.

Sub command dial

Aperture

Shutter

speed

Main command dial

3 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

A ^{The Electronic Analog Exposure Display}

If a CPU lens is attached and a shutter speed other than A or & is selected, the

electronic analog exposure display in the viewfinder shows whether the photograph would be

under- or over-exposed at current settings. Depending on the option chosen for Custom

Setting b1 (EV steps for exposure cntrl.; pg. 177), the amount of under- or over-exposure is

shown in increments of ¹/3 EV, ¹/2 EV, or 1 EV. If the limits of the exposure metering system are

exceeded, the display will flash.

Custom Setting b1 set to 1/3 step

Optimal exposure

Underexposed by ¹/3 EV

Overexposed by over 2 EV

A ^{See Also}

(V) (the default setting) is selected for Custom Setting f7 (Reverse

indicators, pg. 201), the exposure indicators in the viewfinder and shooting information

display are displayed with positive values on the left and negative values on the right. Select

(W) to display negative values on the left and positive values on the right.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

❚❚Long Time-Exposures (M Mode Only)

Shutter speeds of “A” and “&” can be used for long time-exposure

photographs of moving lights, the stars, night scenery, or fireworks. To prevent

blurring caused by camera shake, use a tripod and an optional remote control

(

pg. 241) or remote cord (pg. 241).

Shutter speed

Description

Shutter remains open while shutter-release button is held down. Tripod and

optional remote cord are recommended to prevent blur.

Optional ML-L3 remote control required (pg. 241). Select mode M, set shutter

speed to “A,” and select delayed remote or quick-response remote mode

(pg. 68). Shutter opens when shutter-release button on remote control is

pressed and remains open for thirty minutes or until shutter-release button is

pressed a second time.

1 Ready the camera.

Mount the camera on a tripod or place it on a stable, level surface. To prevent

loss of power before the exposure is complete, use a fully charged battery or an

optional AC adapter. Note that noise may be present in long exposures; before

shooting, choose On for the Long exp. NR option in the shooting menu

(

pg. 165). If you are using an optional remote cord, attach it to the camera.

2 Rotate the mode dial to M.

Mode dial

3 Choose a shutter speed.

Press the shutter-release button halfway to activate the

exposure meters and rotate the main command dial

until “A” appears in the shutter-speed displays. For

a shutter speed of “&“, select delayed remote or

quick-response remote mode after choosing the shutter speed (pg. 64).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 Open the shutter.

A: After focusing, press the shutter-release button on the camera or

remote cord all the way down. Keep the shutter-release button pressed until

the exposure is complete.

&: Press the shutter-release button on the remote control all the way down.

The shutter will open immediately (quick-response remote) or two seconds

after the shutter-release button is pressed (delayed remote) and remain open

until the button is pressed a second time.

5 Close the shutter.

A: Take your finger off the shutter-release button.

&: Press the shutter-release button on the remote control all the way down.

Shooting ends automatically after thirty minutes.

Length of exposure: 35 s

Aperture: f/25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Exposure

Metering

The metering method determines how the camera sets exposure. The following

options are available:

Method

Description

Recommended in most situations; selected automatically in auto and scene

3D color modes. Camera meters a wide area of the frame and sets exposure according

matrix II to distribution of brightness, color, distance, and composition for natural

results.

Camera meters entire frame but assigns greatest weight to center area

(defaults to 8-mm circle in center of frame; can be selected using Custom

Center-

Setting b3, Center-weighted area, pg. 178). Classic meter for portraits;

weighted

recommended when using filters with an exposure factor (filter factor) over 1×

(pg. 240).

Camera meters circle 3.5mm (0.14in.) in diameter (approximately 2.5% of

frame). Circle is centered on current focus point, making it possible to meter

off-center subjects (if non-CPU lens is used, or if Auto-area is selected for AF-

area mode as described on page 173, camera will meter center focus point).

Ensures that subject will be correctly exposed, even when background is much

brighter or darker.

b Spot

To choose a metering method, press the

Z button and rotate the main command

dial until the desired mode is displayed.

Z button

Main command dial

A ^{3D Color Matrix II Metering}

In matrix metering, exposure is set using a 420-segment RGB sensor. Use a type G or D lens for

results that include range information (3D color matrix metering II; pg. 228). With other CPU

lenses, 3D range information is not included (color matrix metering II).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Autoexposure Lock (P, S, and A Modes Only)

Use auto exposure lock to recompose photographs after metering exposure:

1 Select center-weighted or spot

Z button

metering.

Select mode P, S, or A and choose

center-weighted or spot metering

(exposure lock has no effect in mode

M, while auto and scene modes are

not recommended as center-

weighted and spot metering are not

available).

Main command dial

2 Lock exposure.

Shutter-release

button

Position the subject in the selected focus point and press

the shutter-release button halfway. With the shutter-

release button pressed halfway and the subject

positioned in the focus point, press the AE-L/AF-L button to

lock focus and exposure.

AE-L/AF-L button

While exposure lock is in effect, an AE-L indicator will

appear in the viewfinder.

3 Recompose the photograph.

Keeping the AE-L/AF-L button pressed, recompose the photograph and shoot.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

A ^{Adjusting Shutter Speed and Aperture}

While exposure lock is in effect, the following settings can be adjusted without altering the

metered value for exposure:

Mode

Setting

Shutter speed and aperture (flexible program; pg. 80)

Shutter speed

Programmed auto

Shutter-priority auto

Aperture-priority auto

Aperture

The new values can be confirmed in the viewfinder and control panel. Note that the metering

method can not be changed while exposure lock is in effect (changes to metering take effect

when the lock is released).

A ^{See Also}

If On is selected for Custom Setting c1 (Shutter-release button AE-L, pg. 179), exposure will

lock when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. For information on changing the role

of the AE-L/AF-L button, see Custom Setting f4 (Assign AE-L/AF-L button, pg. 200).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Exposure Compensation

Exposure compensation is used to alter exposure from the value suggested by the

camera, making pictures brighter or darker. It is most effective when used with

center-weighted or spot metering (pg. 87).

Exposure compensation is available in modes P, S, and A (in mode M, only the

exposure information shown in the electronic analog exposure display is affected;

shutter speed and aperture do not change).

Press the E button and rotate the main

command dial until the desired value is

displayed in the control panel. Exposure

compensation can be set to values

between –5 EV (underexposure) and

+5 EV (overexposure) in increments of

¹/3 EV. In general, choose positive values

to make the subject brighter, negative

values to make it darker.

E button

Main command dial

0 EV

–0.3 EV

+2 EV

(E button pressed)

At values other than 0, a E icon will be displayed in the control panel and

viewfinder after you release the E button. The current value for exposure

compensation will be displayed when the E button is pressed.

–1 EV

No exposure

compensation

+1 EV

Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure compensation to 0. Exposure

compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off.

A ^{See Also}

For information on choosing the size of the increments available for exposure compensation,

see Custom Setting b1 (EV steps for exposure cntrl., pg. 177). For information on making

adjustments to exposure compensation without pressing the E button, see Custom Setting b2

(Easy exposure compensation, pg. 177).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Flash Compensation

Flash compensation is used to alter flash output from the level suggested by the

camera, changing the brightness of the main subject relative to the background.

Flash output can be increased to make the main subject appear brighter, or reduced

to prevent unwanted highlights or reflections.

Press the M (Y) button and rotate the sub-command dial until the desired value is

displayed in the control panel. Flash compensation can be set to values between

–3 EV (darker) and +1 EV (brighter) in increments of ¹/3 EV. In general, choose

positive values to make the subject brighter, negative values to make it darker.

M button

Sub-command

dial

Control panel

At values other than 0, a Y icon will be displayed in the control panel and

viewfinder after you release the M (Y) button. The current value for flash

compensation will be displayed when the M button is pressed.

0 EV

–0.3 EV

+1.0 EV

(Y button pressed)

Normal flash output can be restored by setting flash compensation to 0.0. Flash

exposure compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off.

A ^{Optional Flash Units}

Flash exposure compensation is also available with an optional SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, SB-400,

or SB-R200 flash units.

A ^{See Also}

For information on choosing the size of the increments available when setting flash

compensation, see Custom Setting b1 (EV steps for exposure cntrl., pg. 177).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Exposure and Flash Bracketing

Bracketing automatically varies selected settings slightly with each shot,

“bracketing” the current value. The setting affected is chosen with Custom Setting e4

(Auto bracketing set; pg. 191); below, it is assumed that AE & flash is selected to

vary exposure and flash level. Other options can be used to vary exposure or flash

level separately or to bracket white balance or Active D-Lighting.

1 Choose the number of shots.

Press the D button and rotate the main command dial to choose the number

of shots in the bracketing sequence (two or three).

No. of shots

Progress

indicator

Control panel

D button

Main command dial

Viewfinder

2 Select an exposure increment.

Press the D button and rotate the sub-command dial to choose the exposure

increment from values between 0.3 EV and 2.0 EV.

Exposure

increment

D button

Sub-command dial

Control panel

A ^{Understanding the Bracketing Display}

Number of shots

Progress indicator

Description

3 shots: unmodified, negative, positive

2 shots: unmodified, positive

2 shots: unmodified, negative

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.

The camera will vary exposure and flash level with each shot.

At default settings, the first shot will be taken at the current

values for exposure and flash compensation and the

following shots at modified values. If the bracketing

sequence consists of three shots, the bracketing increment

will be subtracted from the current values in the second shot

and added in the third shot, “bracketing” the current values.

The modified values can be higher or lower than the

maximum and minimum values for exposure and flash

compensation. The modified shutter speed and aperture are

displayed in the control panel and viewfinder.

While bracketing is in effect, a bracketing progress indicator will be displayed in

the control panel. The y segment will disappear from the indicator when the

unmodified shot is taken, the z indicator when the shot with the negative

increment is taken, and the x indicator when the shot with the positive

increment is taken.

Exposure increment:0 EV

Exposure increment:–1 EV

Exposure increment:+1 EV

To cancel bracketing, press the D button and rotate the main command dial until the

number of shots in the bracketing sequence is zero and M is no longer displayed in

the control panel. The program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing

is activated.

A ^{See Also}

See page 264 for a list of bracketing programs. For information on choosing the size of the

exposure increment, see Custom Setting b1 (EV steps for exposure cntrl., pg. 177). For

information on choosing the order in which bracketing is performed, see Custom Setting e6

(Bracketing order, pg. 195).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

A ^{Exposure Bracketing}

The camera modifies exposure by varying shutter speed and aperture (programmed auto),

aperture (shutter-priority auto), or shutter speed (aperture-priority auto, manual exposure

mode). When On is selected for ISO sensitivity auto control (pg. 166), the camera will

automatically vary ISO sensitivity for optimum exposure when the limits of the camera

exposure system are exceeded. In exposure bracketing, shutter speed will only be changed

after the camera has adjusted ISO sensitivity.

A ^{Exposure and Flash Bracketing}

In ! and 9 modes, shooting will pause after the number of shots specified in the

bracketing program. Selecting auto or scene modes will cancel bracketing; bracketing will

resume when mode P, S, A, or M is selected. Exposure and flash bracketing are cancelled when

WB bracketing or ADL bracketing is selected for Custom Setting e4 (Auto bracketing set;

pg. 191).

A ^{Resuming Exposure or Flash Bracketing}

If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been taken, shooting can be

resumed from the next shot in the sequence after the memory card has been replaced or shots

have been deleted to make room on the memory card. If the camera is turned off before all

shots in the sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume from the next shot in the

sequence when the camera is turned on.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

White Balance

White balance ensures that colors are unaffected by the color of the light source.

Auto white balance is recommended for most light sources; if necessary, other values

can be selected according to the type of source. The following options are available

in P, S, A, and M modes (auto white balance is used in auto and scene modes):

Option

Color temp. (K)

Description

Camera sets white balance automatically;

recommended in most situations. For best results,

use type G or D lens. If built-in or optional flash is

used, white balance reflects conditions in effect

when flash fires.

Auto

(default)

3,500–

8,000^*

J Incandescent

3,000^*

Use under incandescent lighting.

Fluorescent

Use with the following seven light sources:

Use under sodium-vapor lighting (found in sports

venues).

Use under warm-white fluorescent lights.

Use under white fluorescent lights.

Sodium-vapor lamps

2,700^*

Warm-white fluorescent

White fluorescent

3,000^*

3,700^*

Cool-white fluorescent

(default for Fluorescent)

Day white fluorescent

Daylight fluorescent

4,200^*

Use under cool-white fluorescent lights.

5,000^*

6,500^*

Use under daylight white fluorescent lights.

Use under daylight fluorescent lights.

Use under high color temperature light sources (e.g.

mercury-vapor lamps).

High temp. mercury-vapor

7,200^*

H Direct sunlight

Flash

G Cloudy

5,200^*

5,400^*

6,000^*

8,000^*

2,500–

10,000

Use with subjects lit by direct sunlight.

Use with built-in or optional flash.

Use in daylight under overcast skies.

Use in daylight with subjects in the shade.

M Shade

Choose color temp.

Choose color temperature from list of values (pg. 99).

Use subject, light source, or existing photograph as

reference for white balance (pg. 100).

LPreset manual

—

* All values are approximate. Fine-tuning set to 0.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To select a value for white balance, press the WB button and rotate the main

command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the control panel. White

balance can also be adjusted from the shooting menu (pg. 165).

WB button

Main command dial

Control panel

I (Fluorescent)

The bulb type is chosen using the White balance option in the shooting menu (pg.165).

A ^{See Also}

When WB bracketing is selected for Custom Setting e4 (Auto bracketing set, pg. 191), the

camera will create several images each time the shutter is released. White balance will be

varied with each image, “bracketing” the value currently selected for white balance. See page

191 for more information.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Fine-Tuning White Balance

White balance can be “fine tuned” to compensate for variations in the color of the

light source or to introduce a deliberate color cast into an image. White balance is

fine tuned using the White balance option in the shooting menu or by pressing the

WB button and rotating the sub-command dial.

❚❚The White Balance Menu

1 Select a white balance option.

Select White balance in the shooting menu (pg.

165), then highlight a white balance option and

press 2. If an option other than Fluorescent,

Choose color temp., or Preset manual is

selected, proceed to Step 2. If Fluorescent is

selected, highlight a lighting type and press 2. If Choose color temp. is

selected, highlight a color temperature and press 2. If Preset manual is

selected, choose a preset as described on page 106 before proceeding.

2 Fine tune white balance.

Use the multi selector to fine-tune white

balance. White balance can be fine tuned on

the amber (A)–blue (B) axis and the green (G)–

magenta (M) axis. The horizontal (amber-blue)

axis corresponds to color temperature, with

each increment equivalent to about 5 mired.

The vertical (green-magenta) axis has the

Coordinates

Adjustment

similar effects to the corresponding color compensation (CC) filters.

Green (G)

Increase green

Blue (B)

Amber (A)

Increase magenta

Magenta (M)

Increase blue

Increase amber

A ^{White Balance Fine Tuning}

The colors on the fine-tuning axes are relative, not absolute. For example, moving the cursor

to B (blue) when a “warm” setting such as J (incandescent) is selected for white balance will

make photographs slightly “colder” but will not actually make them blue.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3 Press J.

Press J to save settings and return to the shooting menu. If

white balance has been fine-tuned on the A-B axis, a E icon

will be displayed in the control panel.

❚❚The WB Button

At settings other than K (Choose color temp.) and L (Preset manual), the WB

button can be used to fine-tune white balance on the amber (A)–blue (B) axis (pg. 97;

to fine-tune white balance when K or L is selected, use the shooting menu as

described on page 97). Six settings in both directions are available; each increment

is equivalent to about 5 mired (see below). Press the WB button and rotate the sub-

command dial until the desired value is displayed in the control panel. Rotating the

sub-command dial to the left increases the amount of amber (A). Rotating the sub-

command dial to the right increases the amount of blue (B). At settings other than 0,

a E icon appears in the control panel.

WB button

Sub-command dial

Control panel

A ^“Mired”

Any given change in color temperature produces a greater difference in color at low color

temperatures than it would at higher color temperatures. For example, a change of 1000 K

produces a much greater change in color at 3000 K than at 6000 K. Mired, calculated by

multiplying the inverse of the color temperature by 10 ⁶, is a measure of color temperature that

takes such variation into account, and as such is the unit used in color-temperature

compensation filters. E.g.:

• 4000 K–3000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=83 mired

• 7000 K–6000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=24 mired

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Choosing a Color Temperature

At a setting of K (Choose color temp.), color temperature can be selected by

pressing the WB button and rotating the sub-command dial until the desired value is

displayed in the control panel. Color temperature can also be selected in the

shooting menu (pg. 165).

WB button

Sub-command dial

Control panel

A ^{Color Temperature}

The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer and other conditions. Color

temperature is an objective measure of the color of a light source, defined with reference to

the temperature to which an object would have to be heated to radiate light in the same

wavelengths. While light sources with a color temperature in the neighborhood of 5,000–

5,500 K appear white, light sources with a lower color temperature, such as incandescent light

bulbs, appear slightly yellow or red. Light sources with a higher color temperature appear

tinged with blue.

A ^{Choose Color Temperature}

Note that the desired results will not be obtained with flash or fluorescent lighting. Choose N

(Flash) or I (Fluorescent) for these sources. With other light sources, take a test shot to

determine if the selected value is appropriate.

A ^{The White Balance Menu}

Color temperature can also be selected in the white balance menu. Note that the color

temperature with the WB button and the sub-command dial replaces the value selected in the

white balance menu.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Preset Manual

Preset manual is used to record and recall custom white balance settings for shooting

under mixed lighting or to compensate for light sources with a strong color cast. Two

methods are available for setting preset white balance:

Method

Direct

Description

Neutral gray or white object is placed under lighting that will be used in

measurement final photograph and white balance is measured by camera (pg. 101).

Copy from existing

White balance is copied from photo on memory card (pg. 105).

photograph

The camera can store up to five values for preset white balance in presets d-0 through

d-4. A descriptive comment can be added to any white balance preset (pg. 107).

d-0: Stores last value measured

for white balance (pg. 101). This

preset is overwritten when a

new value is measured.

d-1–d-4: Store values copied from d-0 (pg. 104).

Store values copied from

images on memory card

(pg. 105).

100

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

❚❚Measuring a Value for Preset White Balance

1 Light a reference object.

Place a neutral gray or white object under the lighting that will be used in the

final photograph. In studio settings, a standard gray panel can be used as a

reference object. Note that exposure is automatically increased by 1 EV when

measuring white balance; in exposure mode M, adjust exposure so that the

electronic analog exposure displays shows 0 (pg. 84).

2 Set white balance to L (Preset manual).

Press the WB button and rotate the main command dial until L is displayed in

the control panel.

WB button

Main command dial

Control panel

3 Select direct measurement mode.

Release the WB button briefly and then press the button

until the L icon in the control panel starts to flash. A

flashing D will also appear in the control panel and

viewfinder. At default settings, the displays will flash for

about six seconds. To exit without measuring a value for

preset white balance, press the WB button again.

Control panel

Viewfinder

101

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 Measure white balance.

Before the indicators stop flashing, frame the reference object so that

it fills the viewfinder and press the shutter-release button all the way

down. The camera will measure a value for white balance and store it in preset

d-0. No photograph will be recorded; white balance can be measured

accurately even when the camera is not in focus.

5 Check the results.

If the camera was able to measure a value for white

balance, C will flash in the control panel, while the

viewfinder will show a flashing a. At default settings,

the displays will flash for about six seconds.

Control panel

Viewfinder

If lighting is too dark or too bright, the camera may be

unable to measure white balance. A flashing b a will

appear in the control panel and viewfinder (at default

settings, the displays will flash for about six seconds).

Press the shutter-release button halfway to return to

Step 4 and measure white balance again.

Control panel

Viewfinder

6 Select preset d-0.

If the new value for preset white balance will be used immediately, select preset

d-0 by pressing the WB button and rotating the sub-command dial until d-0 is

displayed in the control panel.

D ^{Direct Measurement Mode}

If no operations are performed while the displays are flashing, direct measurement mode will

end in the time selected for Custom Setting c2 (Auto meter-off delay, pg. 179). The default

setting is six seconds.

102

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

A ^{Preset d-0}

The new value for white balance will be stored in preset d-0,

automatically replacing the previous value for this preset (no

confirmation dialog will be displayed). A thumbnail will be displayed

in the preset white balance list.

To use the new value for white balance, select preset d-0 (if no value has been measured for

white balance before d-0 is selected, white balance will be set to a color temperature of

5,200 K, the same as Direct sunlight). The new white balance value will remain in preset d-0

until white balance is measured again. By copying preset d-0 to one of the other presets before

measuring a new value for white balance, up to five white balance values can be stored (pg.

104).

103

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

❚❚Copying White Balance from d-0 to Presets d-1–d-4

Follow the steps below to copy a measured value for white balance from d-0 to any

of the other presets (d-1–d-4).

1 Select L (Preset manual).

Highlight Preset manual in the white balance

menu (pg. 95) and press 2.

2 Select a destination.

Highlight the destination preset (d-1 to d-4)

and press the W button.

W button

3 Copy d-0 to the selected preset.

Highlight Copy d-0 and press J. If a comment

has been created for d-0 (pg. 107), the comment

will be copied to the comment for the selected

preset.

A ^{Choosing a White Balance Preset}

To select another white balance preset in the Preset manual menu (see

Step 3, above), press 1to highlight the current white balance preset

(d-0–d-4) and press 2.

104

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

❚❚Copying White Balance from a Photograph (d-1–d-4 Only)

Follow the steps below to copy a value for white balance from a photograph on the

memory card to a selected preset (d-1–d-4 only). Existing white balance values can

not be copied to preset d-0.

1 Select L (Preset manual).

Highlight Preset manual in the white balance

menu (pg. 95) and press 2.

2 Select a destination.

Highlight the destination preset (d-1 to d-4)

and press the W button.

W button

3 Choose Select image.

Highlight Select image and press 2.

4 Highlight a source image.

Highlight the source image. To view the

highlighted image full frame, press the X

button.

5 Copy white balance.

Press J to copy the white balance value for the

highlighted photograph to the selected preset.

If the highlighted photograph has a comment (pg. 205), the comment will be

copied to the comment for the selected preset.

105

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

❚❚Selecting a White Balance Preset

To set white balance to a preset value:

1 Select L (Preset manual).

Highlight Preset manual in the white balance

menu (pg. 95) and press 2.

2 Select a preset.

Highlight the desired preset and press the

W button. To select the highlighted preset

and display the fine tuning menu (pg. 97)

without completing the next step, press J

W button

instead of pressing the W button.

3 Select Set.

Highlight Set and press 2. Fine tuning menu

for the selected white balance preset is

displayed (pg. 98).

A ^{Selecting a White Balance Preset: the WB Button}

At a setting of L (Preset manual), presets can also be selected by pressing the WB button

and rotating the sub-command dial. The current preset is displayed in the control panel while

the WB button is pressed.

WB button

Sub-command dial

Control panel

106

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

❚❚Entering a Comment

Follow the steps below to enter a descriptive comment of up to thirty-six characters

for a selected white balance preset.

1 Select L (Preset manual).

Highlight Preset manual in the white balance

menu (pg. 95) and press 2.

2 Select a preset.

Highlight the desired preset and press the

W button.

W button

3 Select Edit comment.

Highlight Edit comment and press 2.

4 Edit the comment.

Edit the comment as described on page 169.

107

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Picture Controls

Nikon’s unique Picture Control system makes it possible to share image processing

settings among compatible devices and software. Select from the Picture Controls

provided with the camera to instantly adjust image processing settings, or make

independent adjustments to sharpening, contrast, brightness, saturation, and hue.

These settings can be saved under new names as custom Picture Controls to be

recalled or edited at will. Custom Picture Controls can also be saved to the memory

card for use in compatible software, and software-created Picture Controls can be

loaded into the camera. Any given set of Picture Controls will produce nearly the

same results on all cameras that support the Nikon Picture Control system.

❚❚Using Picture Controls

Picture Controls can be used as described below.

•

Select Nikon Picture Controls (pg. 109): Select an existing Nikon Picture Control.

Modify existing Picture Controls (pg. 110): Modify an existing Picture Control to create a

combination of sharpening, contrast, brightness, saturation, and hue for a

particular scene or effect.

•

Create custom Picture Controls (pg. 113): Store modified Picture Controls under unique

names and recall or edit them as desired.

Share custom Picture Controls (pg. 115): Custom Picture Controls created with the

camera can be saved to the memory card for use in ViewNX (supplied) and other

compatible software, or software-created custom Picture Controls can be loaded

into the camera.

•

Manage custom Picture Controls (pg. 117): Rename or delete custom Picture Controls.

A ^{Nikon Picture Controls Versus Custom Picture Controls}

The Picture Controls supplied by Nikon are referred to as Nikon Picture Controls. In addition to

the Nikon Picture Controls supplied with the camera, optional Picture Controls are available for

download from Nikon websites. Custom Picture Controls are created through modifications to

existing Nikon Picture Controls. Both Nikon and custom Picture Controls can be shared among

compatible devices and software.

108

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Selecting Nikon Picture Controls

The camera offers six preset Nikon Picture Controls. Choose a Picture Control

according to the subject or type of scene.

Option

Description

Standard processing for balanced results. Recommended for most

situations.

Q Standard

Minimal processing for natural results. Choose for photographs that will

later be extensively processed or retouched.

R Neutral

Pictures are enhanced for a vivid, photoprint effect. Choose for

photographs that emphasize primary colors.

S Vivid

T Monochrome Take monochrome photographs.

e Portrait

f Landscape

Lends a natural texture and rounded feel to the skin of portrait subjects.

Produces vibrant landscapes and cityscapes.

❚❚Choosing a Picture Control

1 Select Set Picture Control.

In the shooting menu (pg. 165), highlight Set

Picture Control and press 2.

2 Select a Picture Control.

Highlight the desired Picture Control and press

A ^{The Picture Control Grid}

Pressing the W button in Step 2 displays a Picture Control grid

showing the contrast and saturation for the selected Picture Control in

relation to the other Picture Controls (only contrast is displayed when

Monochrome is selected). To select a different Picture Control, press

1or 3, then press 2to display Picture Control options and press J.

A ^{The Picture Control Indicator}

The current Picture Control is shown in the shooting information

display when the R button is pressed. Picture Controls can also be

selected in the shooting information display (pg. 12).

Picture Control

indicator

109

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Modifying Existing Picture Controls

Existing Nikon or custom Picture Controls can be modified to

suit the scene or the user’s creative intent. Choose a balanced

combination of settings using Quick adjust, or make manual

adjustments to individual settings.

1 Select a Picture Control.

Highlight the desired Picture Control in the Set

Picture Control menu (pg. 109) and press 2.

2 Adjust settings.

Press 1or 3to highlight the desired setting

and press 4or 2to choose a value (pg. 111).

Repeat this step until all settings have been

adjusted, or select Quick adjust to choose a

preset combination of settings. Default settings

can be restored by pressing the O button.

3 Press J.

A ^{Modifications to Original Picture Controls}

Picture Controls that have been modified from default settings are

indicated by an asterisk (“*”) in the Set Picture Control menu.

110

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

❚❚Picture Control Settings

Option

Description

Choose from options between –2 and +2 to reduce or exaggerate the effect

of the selected Picture Control (note that this resets all manual adjustments).

For example, choosing positive values for Vivid makes pictures more vivid.

Not available with Neutral, Monochrome, or custom Picture Controls.

Control the sharpness of outlines. Select A to adjust sharpening

Quick adjust

Sharpening automatically according to the type of scene, or choose from values between

0 (no sharpening) and 9 (the higher the value, the greater the sharpening).

Select A to adjust contrast automatically according to the type of scene, or

choose from values between –3 and +3 (choose lower values to prevent

highlights in portrait subjects from being “washed out” in direct sunlight,

higher values to preserve detail in misty landscapes and other low-contrast

Contrast

subjects). Not available when Active D-Lighting (pg. 119) is on; reset if Active

D-Lighting is activated after value is changed.

Choose –1 for reduced brightness, +1 for enhanced brightness. Does not

Brightness affect exposure. Not available when Active D-Lighting (pg. 119) is on; reset if

Active D-Lighting is activated after value is changed.

Control the vividness of colors. Select A to adjust saturation automatically

Saturation according to the type of scene, or choose from values between –3 and +3

(lower values reduce saturation and higher values increase it).

Choose negative values (to a minimum of –3) to make reds more purple,

blues more green, and greens more yellow, positive values (up to +3) to

Hue

make reds more orange, greens more blue, and blues more purple.

Filter

Simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome photographs. Choose

effects

from Off (the default setting), yellow, orange, red, and green (pg. 112).

Choose the tint used in monochrome photographs from B&W (black-and-

white, the default setting), Sepia, Cyanotype (blue-tinted monochrome),

Red, Yellow, Green, Blue Green, Blue, Purple Blue, Red Purple (pg. 112).

Toning

D ^{“A” (Auto)}

Results for auto contrast and saturation vary with exposure and the

position of the subject in the frame. Use a type G or D lens for best

results. The icons for Picture Controls that use auto contrast and

saturation are displayed in green in the Picture Control grid, and lines

appear parallel to the axes of the grid.

111

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

A ^{The Picture Control Grid}

Pressing the W button in Step 2 displays a Picture Control grid

showing the contrast and saturation for the selected Picture Control in

relation to the other Picture Controls (only contrast is displayed when

Monochrome is selected). Release the W button to return to the

Picture Control menu.

A ^{Previous Settings}

The line under the value display in the Picture Control setting menu

indicates the previous value for the setting. Use this as a reference

when adjusting settings.

A ^{Filter Effects (Monochrome Only)}

The options in this menu simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome photographs. The

following filter effects are available:

Option

Yellow

Description

Enhances contrast. Can be used to tone down the brightness of the sky in

Orange landscape photographs. Orange produces more contrast than yellow, red more

contrast than orange.

Green Softens skin tones. Can be used for portraits.

Red

Note that the effects achieved with Filter effects are more pronounced than those produced

by physical glass filters.

A ^{Toning (Monochrome Only)}

Pressing 3when Toning is selected displays saturation options. Press

4or 2to adjust saturation. Saturation control is not available when

B&W (black-and-white) is selected.

112

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Creating Custom Picture Controls

The Nikon Picture Controls supplied with the camera can be modified and saved as

custom Picture Controls.

1 Select Manage Picture Control.

In the shooting menu (pg. 165), highlight

Manage Picture Control and press 2.

2 Select Save/edit.

Highlight Save/edit and press 2.

3 Select a Picture Control.

Highlight an existing Picture Control and press

2, or press J to proceed to step 5 and save a

copy of the highlighted Picture Control without

further modification.

4 Edit the selected Picture Control.

See page 111 for more information. To abandon

any changes and start over, press the O button.

Press J when settings are complete.

5 Select a destination.

Choose a destination for the custom Picture

Control (C-1 through C-9) and press 2.

113

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 Name the Picture Control.

Keyboard

area

Name area

The text-entry dialog shown at right will be

displayed. By default, new Picture Controls

are named by adding a two-digit number

(assigned automatically) to the name of the

existing Picture Control. This name can be

edited to create a new name as described

below.

To move the cursor in the name area, press the W button and press 4or 2. To

enter a new letter at the current cursor position, use the multi selector to

highlight the desired character in the keyboard area and press the X button. To

delete the character at the current cursor position, press the O button.

Custom Picture Control names can be up to 19 characters long. Any characters

after the 19th will be deleted.

After entering the name, press J. The new Picture

Control will appear in the Picture Control list.

Custom Picture Controls can be renamed at any time

using the Rename option in the Manage Picture Control

menu.

A ^{Custom Picture Controls}

The edit display for custom Picture Controls contains the same options

as the original Nikon Picture Control on which it is based. The original

control is shown by an icon in the top right corner of the display.

Original Picture

Control icon

A ^{Custom Picture Controls}

The options available with custom Picture Controls are the same as those on which the custom

Picture Control was based.

114

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sharing Custom Picture Controls

Custom Picture Controls created using the Picture Control Utility available with

ViewNX or optional software such as Capture NX 2 can be copied to a memory card

and loaded into the camera, or custom Picture Controls created with the camera can

be copied to the memory card to be used in compatible cameras and software.

❚❚Copying Custom Picture Controls to the Camera

1 Select Load/save.

In the Manage Picture Control menu, highlight

Load/save and press 2.

2 Select Copy to camera.

Highlight Copy to camera and press 2.

3 Select a Picture Control.

Highlight a custom Picture Control and either

press 2to view current Picture Control settings,

or press J to proceed to Step 4.

4 Select a destination.

Choose a destination for the custom Picture

Control (C-1 through C-9) and press 2.

115

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 Name the Picture Control.

Name the Picture Control as described on page

114. The new Picture Control will appear in the

Picture Control list and can be renamed at any

time using the Rename option in the Manage

Picture Control menu.

❚❚Saving Custom Picture Controls to the Memory Card

1 Select Copy to card.

After displaying the Load/save menu as

described in Step 1 on page 115, highlight Copy

to card and press 2.

2 Select a Picture Control.

Highlight a custom Picture Control and press 2.

3 Choose a destination.

Choose a destination from slots 1 through 99

and press J to save the selected Picture Control

to the memory card. Any Picture Controls that

may already have been saved to the selected

slot will be overwritten.

A ^{Saving Custom Picture Controls}

Up to 99 custom Picture Controls can be stored on the memory card at any one time. The

memory card can only be used to store user-created custom Picture Controls. The Nikon

Picture Controls supplied with the camera can not be copied to the memory card.

116

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Managing Custom Picture Controls

Follow the steps below to rename or delete custom Picture Controls.

❚❚Renaming Custom Picture Controls

1 Select Rename.

In the Manage Picture Control menu, highlight

Rename and press 2.

2 Select a Picture Control.

Highlight a custom Picture Control (C-1 through

C-9) and press 2.

3 Rename the Picture Control.

Rename the Picture Control as described on

page 114.

❚❚Deleting Custom Picture Controls from the Camera

1 Select Delete.

In the Manage Picture Control menu, highlight

Delete and press 2.

2 Select a Picture Control.

Highlight a custom Picture Control (C-1 through

C-9) and press 2.

3 Select Yes.

Highlight Yes and press J to delete the selected

Picture Control.

117

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

❚❚Deleting Custom Picture Controls from the Memory Card

1 Select Load/save.

In the Manage Picture Control menu, highlight

Load/save and press 2.

2 Select Delete from card.

Highlight Delete from card and press 2.

3 Select a Picture Control.

Highlight a custom Picture Control (slot1

through 99) and either:

• press 2to view current Picture Control

settings, or

• press J to display confirmation dialog shown

at right.

4 Select Yes.

Highlight Yes and press J to delete the selected

Picture Control.

A ^{Nikon Picture Controls}

The Nikon Picture Controls supplied with the camera (Standard, Neutral, Vivid,

Monochrome, Portrait, and Landscape) can not be renamed or deleted.

118

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Active D-Lighting

Active D-Lighting preserves details in highlights and shadows, creating photographs

with natural contrast. Use for high contrast scenes, for example when

photographing brightly lit outdoor scenery through a door or window or taking

pictures of shaded subjects on a sunny day. To use Active D-Lighting:

1 Select matrix metering.

Matrix metering (Z, pg. 87) is recommended when using Active D-Lighting.

2 Select Active D-Lighting.

In the shooting menu (pg. 165), highlight Active

D-lighting and press 2.

3 Choose an option.

Highlight Auto, Extra high, High, Normal, Low,

or Off and press J. Choose Auto to let the

camera adjust D-Lighting automatically

according to shooting conditions.

119

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

D ^{Active D-Lighting}

Noise (grains, banding, mottling) may appear in photographs taken with Active D-Lighting at

high ISO sensitivities. The Brightness and Contrast Picture Control settings (pg. 111) can not

be adjusted while active D-Lighting is in effect. In exposure mode M, an Active D-Lighting

setting of Auto is equivalent to Normal.

D ^{“Active D-Lighting” Versus “D-Lighting”}

The Active D-Lighting option in the shooting menu adjusts exposure before shooting to

optimize the dynamic range, while the D-Lighting option in the retouch menu optimizes

dynamic range in images after shooting.

A ^{ADL Bracketing}

When ADL bracketing is selected for Custom Setting e4 (Auto bracketing set, pg. 191), the

camera will automatically vary Active D-Lighting over two photographs: the first will be taken

with the current setting for Active-D-Lighting, the second with Active D-Lighting off. See page

193 for more information.

120

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Multiple Exposure

Follow the steps below to record a series of two to three exposures in a single

photograph, using RAW data from the camera image sensor to produce colors

noticeably superior to photographs combined in an imaging application. Multiple

exposures can be recorded at any image quality setting.

❚❚Creating a Multiple Exposure

Note that at default settings, shooting will end and a multiple exposure will be

recorded automatically if no operations are performed for 30 s.

1 Select Multiple exposure.

Highlight Multiple exposure in the shooting

menu and press 2.

2 Select Number of shots.

Highlight Number of shots and press 2.

3 Select the number of shots.

Press 1or 3to choose the number of

exposures (two or three) that will be combined

to form a single photograph and press J.

4 Select Auto gain.

Highlight Auto gain and press 2.

A ^{Extended Recording Times}

For an interval between exposures of more than 30 s, select On for the Image review (pg. 163)

option in the playback menu and extend the monitor-off delay for image review using Custom

Setting c4 (Monitor off delay, pg. 180). The maximum interval between exposures is 30 s

longer than the option selected for Custom Setting c4.

121

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 Set gain.

Highlight one of the following options and

press J.

Option

Description

Gain adjusted according to number of

exposures actually recorded (gain for each

(default) exposure is set to ¹/2 for 2 exposures, ¹/3 for

3 exposures).

Gain is not adjusted when recording

multiple exposure. Recommended if

background is dark.

Off

6 Select Done.

Highlight Done and press J. A n icon will be

displayed in the control panel. To exit without

taking a multiple exposure, select Multiple

exposure > Reset in the shooting menu.

7 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.

In ! and 9 release modes (pg. 64), the

camera records all exposures in a single burst. In

single-frame release mode, one photograph will

be taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed; continue shooting

until all exposures have been recorded (for information on interrupting a

multiple exposure before all photographs are recorded, see page 123).

122

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The n icon will blink until shooting ends. When

shooting ends, multiple exposure mode will end

and the n icon will no longer be displayed.

Repeat steps 1–7 to take additional multiple

exposures.

❚❚Interrupting Multiple Exposures

Selecting Multiple exposure in the shooting menu while a

multiple exposure is being recorded displays the options shown

at right. To interrupt a multiple exposure before the specified

number of exposures have been taken, highlight Cancel and

press J. If shooting ends before the specified number of

exposures has been taken, a multiple exposure will be created

from the exposures recorded to that point. If Auto gain is on, gain will be adjusted

to reflect the number of exposures actually recorded. Note that shooting will end

automatically if:

• A two-button reset is performed (pg. 75)

• The camera is turned off

• The battery is exhausted

• Pictures are deleted

D ^{Multiple Exposure}

Do not remove or replace the memory card while recording a multiple exposure.

Live view (pg. 43) can not be used to record multiple exposures.

The information listed in the playback photo information display (including date of recording

and camera orientation) is for the first shot in the multiple exposure.

A ^{Other Settings}

While multiple exposure mode is in effect, memory cards can not be formatted, changes can

not be made to bracketing or to shooting menu options other than White balance, and the

Lock mirror up for cleaning and Image Dust Off ref photo options in the setup menu can

not used.

123

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The GP-1 GPS Unit

The GP-1 GPS unit (available separately) can be connected to the camera’s accessory

terminal as shown below using the cable supplied with the GP-1, allowing

information on the camera’s current position to be recorded when photographs are

taken. Turn the camera off before connecting the GP-1; for more information, see the

GP-1 manual.

When the camera establishes communication with the GP-1, a

X icon will be displayed in the control panel. Photo

information for pictures taken while the X icon is displayed will

include an additional page (pg. 133) recording the current

latitude, longitude, altitude, and Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). If no data are

received from the GP-1 for two seconds, the X icon will clear from the display and

the camera will stop recording GPS information.

A ^{GPS Data}

GPS data are only recorded when the X icon is displayed. Confirm

that the X icon is displayed in the control panel before shooting. A

flashing X icon indicates that the GP-1 is searching for a signal;

pictures taken while the X icon is flashing will not include GPS data.

124

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

❚❚Setup Menu Options

The GPS item in the setup menu contains the options listed below.

•

Auto meter off: Choose whether or not the exposure meters will turn off

automatically when the GP-1 is attached.

Option

Description

Exposure meters will turn off automatically if no operations are performed for

Enable the period specified in Custom Setting c2 (Auto meter-off delay, pg. 179). This

(default) reduces the drain on the battery but may prevent GPS data from being recorded

if the shutter-release button is pressed all the way down without pausing.

Exposure meters will not turn off while the GP-1 is connected; GPS data will

always be recorded.

Disable

•

Position: This item is only available if the GP-1 is connected, when it displays the

current latitude, longitude, altitude, and Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) as

reported by the GP-1.

A ^{Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)}

UTC data is provided by the GPS device and is independent of the camera clock.

125

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

126

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

More on Playback

This chapter describes how to view photographs and details the operations that can

be performed during playback.

Full-Frame Playback...................................................................................................... 128

Photo Information ...................................................................................................................... 129

Thumbnail Playback ..................................................................................................... 135

Calendar Playback......................................................................................................... 136

Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom ....................................................................... 138

Protecting Photographs from Deletion .................................................................... 139

Deleting Individual Photographs............................................................................... 140

Pictmotion ...................................................................................................................... 141

Slide Shows..................................................................................................................... 143

127

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Full-Frame Playback

To play photographs back, press the K button. The

most recent photograph will be displayed in the

monitor.

Use

Description

Viewadditional

photographs

Press 2to view photographs in order recorded, 4to view

photographs in reverse order.

View photo

information

Press 1or 3to view information about current photograph

(pg. 129).

View

See page 135 for more information on the thumbnail display.

See page 138 for more information on playback zoom.

thumbnails

Zoom in on

photograph

Confirmation dialog will be displayed. Press O again to delete

photo.

Delete images

Changeprotect

status

To protect image, or to remove protection from protected image,

press

button (pg. 139).

Return to

shooting mode

Monitor will turn off. Photographs can be taken immediately.

Display menus

See page 159 for more information.

Create retouched copy of current photograph (pg. 209). If

current picture is marked with 1 icon to show that it is a

movie, pressing J starts movie playback (pg. 52).

Retouch photo

or play movie

A ^{Rotate Tall}

To display “tall” (portrait-orientation) photographs in tall orientation,

select On for the Rotate tall option in the playback menu (pg. 163).

A ^{Image Review}

When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu (pg. 163),

photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor for about 4 s

(the default setting) after shooting.

A ^{See Also}

See Custom Setting c4 (Monitor off delay, pg. 180) for information on choosing how long the

monitor will remain on when no operations are performed.

128

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Photo Information

Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in full-frame playback.

There are up to eight pages of information for each photo. Press 1or 3to cycle

through photo information as shown below. Note that shooting data, RGB

histograms, and highlights are only displayed if corresponding option is selected for

Display mode (pg. 163). GPS data are only displayed if a GPS device was used when

the photo was taken.

1/12

KON

D90

1/12

I SE RE

_NI ISO

NORM

^NAC

L I GH

_–R

LATITUDE

–

L_M^MIGHT_NIN

35 36. 371'

RET

LONGITUDE

AR_N

^WY

OTYPE

139 43. 696'

35m

ALTITUDE

TRI

SPR^MIN

TIME(UTC)

15/09/2008

250 F11

200

35mm

01 15 29

3636

AUTO 0,

100NCD90

0001. JPG

NOR AL

4288x2^M848

100NCD90

0001. JPG

15 09 2008 10 02 27

428^N8^Ox2^RM848

KON

D90

15 09

2008 10 15 29

12/12

KON

D90

12/12

File information

Overview data

GPS data

Shooting data 3

TR SP

250 F11

^MXP. MODE, _NI S_N

200

HITE

LANCE

UTO, 0,

^WCO

SPAC_NE

RGB

, EXP. TU_N

TURE

TRL : ST

DARD

OCAL LE

35mm

QUICK ADJUST : 0

–

5.6

18 105

F^N

V_M

–

CO TRA_N^NST

RPE ING

–

BR^NIG

ES_NS :0

Built

i n, TTL,

TUR

, +

CMD

TTL, 3. 0

TTL

OFF

High l i ghts

KO 90

D90

12/12

N I KON D90

13 / 13

RGB histogram

Highlights

Shooting data 1

Shooting data 2

❚❚File Information

1/12

100NCD90

0001. JPG

428^N8^Ox2^R^M848

2008 10 02 27

1 Protect status................. 139 4 File name........................... 61 7 Time of recording............27

2 Retouch indicator ........ 209 5 Image quality................... 62 8 Date of recording............27

3 Frame number/

6 Image size ......................... 63 9 Folder name................... 162

total number of images

129

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

❚❚RGB Histogram ¹

N I KON D90

13 / 13

1 Protect status .................139 5 Histogram (RGB channel).

6 Histogram (red channel)

7 Histogram (green

channel)

8 Histogram (blue channel)

9 Frame number/

In all histograms,

2 Retouch indicator .........209

3 White balance ..................95

White balance fine-

horizontal axis gives

pixel brightness, vertical

axis number of pixels.

tuning ..............................97

4 Camera name

total number of images

1 Displayed only if RGB histogram is selected for Display mode (pg. 163).

A ^{Playback Zoom}

To zoom in on the photograph when the histogram is displayed, press X

(for more information on playback zoom, see page 138). The histogram

will be updated to show only the data for the portion of the image visible

in the monitor.

N I KON D90

13 / 13

A ^Histograms

Camera histograms are intended as a guide only and may differ from those displayed in

imaging applications. Some sample histograms are shown below:

If the image contains objects with a wide range of

brightnesses, the distribution of tones will be relatively

even.

If the image is dark, tone distribution will be shifted to the

left.

If the image is bright, tone distribution will be shifted to the

right.

Increasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution of tones to the right, while

decreasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution to the left. Histograms can provide

a rough idea of overall exposure when bright ambient lighting makes it difficult to see

photographs in the monitor.

130

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

❚❚Highlights ^*

High l i ghts

12/12

1 Protect status .................139 3 Image highlights ..........163 5 Frame number/

total number of images

2 Retouch indicator .........209 4 Camera name

* Blinking areas indicate highlights for current channel.

❚❚Shooting Data Page 1 ¹

1 250 F11

^MXP.

E, _NI S_N

200

TR SPD_DAP

, EXP. TU_N

1/6

OCAL LE

35mm

–

F^NV_M

18 105

3. 5 5.6

–

_–VR

+ .

Built i n TTL 1 0

CMD

TTL, 3. 0

A TTL 3 0

OFF

D90

12/12

1 Protect status .................139 5 Exposure

9 Flash mode........................71

Flash compensation.......91

10 Commander mode/group

name/flash control

mode/flash

compensation............ 185

11 Camera name

12 Frame number/

compensation .............. 90

Optimal exposure

2 Retouch indicator .........209

3 Metering ............................87

Shutter speed............81, 83

Aperture...................... 82, 83

4 Shooting Mode..34, 41, 78

tuning ³.........................178

6 Focal length....................228

7 Lens data

ISO sensitivity ²................74 8 Focus mode............... 54, 59

Lens VR (vibration

reduction) ⁴.................... 26

total number of images

1 Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode (pg. 163).

2 Displayed in red if photo was taken with ISO sensitivity auto control on.

3 Displayed if Custom Setting b4 (Fine tune optimal exposure, pg. 178) has been set to a

value other than zero for any metering method.

4 Displayed only if VR lens is attached.

131

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

❚❚Shooting Data Page 2 ¹

HITE B

LANCE

UTO, 0,

^WCO

OR SPAC_NE

RGB

TURE

TRL

: ST

: 0

NDARD

QUICK ADJUST

CO TRA_N^NST

RPE ING

BR^NIG

ES_NS :0

TUR

HUE

D90

12/12

1 Protect status .................139 5 Picture Control ..............108 10 Saturation ⁴..................... 111

Filter effects ⁵................. 111

11 Hue ⁴................................. 111

Toning ⁵............................ 111

2 Retouch indicator .........209 6 Quick adjust ².................111

Original Picture

3 White balance ..................95

Control ³........................114

Color temperature.......99

White balance fine-

7 Sharpening.....................111 12 Camera name

8 Contrast ...........................111 13 Folder number–

frame number

tuning ..............................97

Preset manual ................100

4 Color space......................167

9 Brightness .......................111

1 Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode (pg. 163).

2 Standard, Vivid, Portrait, and Landscape Picture Controls only.

3 Neutral, Monochrome, and custom Picture Controls.

4 Not displayed with monochrome Picture Controls.

5 Monochrome Picture Controls only.

❚❚Shooting Data Page 3 ^*

I SE RE

_NI ISO

NORM

^NAC

L I GH

–

L_M^MIGHT_NIN

–

RET

AR_N

^WYA_M

OTYPE

TRI

SPRI

E SP

G^N

E 3636

D90

12/12

1 Protect status .................139 4 Active D-Lighting .........166 8 Folder number–

frame number

2 Retouch indicator .........209 5 Retouch history.............209

3 High ISO NR ....................168 6 Image comment...........205

Long exposure NR ........167

7 Camera name

* Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode (pg. 163).

132

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

❚❚GPS Data ^*

LATITUDE

35 36. 371'

LONGITUDE

139 43. 696'

35m

ALTITUDE

15/09/2008

TIME(UTC)

01 15 29

D90

12/12

1 Protect status .................139 5 Altitude

2 Retouch indicator .........209 6 Coordinated Universal

8 Folder number–

frame number

Time (UTC)

7 Camera name

3 Latitude

4 Longitude

* Displayed only if GPS device was used when photo was taken (pg. 124).

133

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

❚❚Overview Data

1/12

D90

1 250 F5 6

200

35mm

–

1. 3

1 0

REAR

10000 A6,

100NCD90

15 09

0001. JPG

NOR AL

2008 10 15 29

4288x2^M848

1 Folder number/

5 Histogram showing the

distribution of tones in

the image (pg. 130).

9 Image comment

frame number

2 Protect status .................139

3 Camera name

indicator....................... 205

10 Flash mode........................71

11 Flash compensation.......91

12 Exposure compensation

............................................90

13 Metering ............................87

14 Mode .....................34, 41, 78

15 Shutter speed............81, 83

16 Aperture...................... 82, 83

Horizontal axis

corresponds to pixel

brightness, vertical axis

shows number of pixels

of each brightness in

image.

4 Retouch indicator .........209

6 ISO sensitivity ^*................ 74

7 Focal length....................228

8 GPS data indicator .......124

* Displayed in red if photo was taken with ISO sensitivity auto control on.

1/12

KON

D90

1 250 F5 6

I 0 3

35mm

–

1. 3

1 0

REAR

10000 A6,

0001. JPG

2008 10 15 29

100NСD90

428^N8^Ox2^RM848

21 20

17 Picture Control...............108 23 Date of recording ........... 27 25 White balance ..................95

Color temperature..........99

White balance

fine-tuning .....................97

Preset manual ............... 100

26 Color space..................... 167

18 Active D-Lighting .........119 24 Folder name ...................162

19 File name ...........................61

20 Image quality ...................63

21 Image size..........................62

22 Time of recording ...........27

134

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Thumbnail Playback

To display images in “contact sheets” of four, nine, or 72 images, press the W button.

Full-frame

playback

Thumbnail

playback

Calendar

playback

Use

Description

Display more

images

Press W button to increase the number of images displayed.

Press X button to reduce the number of images displayed.

When four images are displayed, press to view highlighted

image full frame.

Display fewer

images

Use multi selector or command dials to highlight images for

full-frame playback, playback zoom (pg. 138), or deletion (pg.

140). Use main command dial to move cursor left or right,

sub-command dial to move cursor up or down.

Highlight images

Viewhighlighted

image

Delete

highlighted

photo

Press J to display the highlighted image full frame.

See page 140 for more information.

Change protect

status of

highlighted

photo

See page 139 for more information.

Return to

shooting mode

Monitor will turn off. Photographs can be taken immediately.

See page 159 for more information.

Display menus

135

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Calendar Playback

To view images taken on a selected date, press the W button when 72 images are

displayed.

Full-frame

playback

Thumbnail

playback

Calendar

playback

Press the W button to toggle between the date list and the list of thumbnails for the

selected date. Use the multi selector to highlight dates in the date list or to highlight

pictures in the thumbnail list.

Thumbnail list

Date list

136

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The operations can be performed depend on whether the cursor is in the date list or

the thumbnail list:

Use

Description

Toggle between date

list and thumbnail list

Exit to thumbnail

playback/Zoom in on

highlighted photo

Toggle full frame

playback

Press W button in date list to place cursor in thumbnail

list. Press again to return to date list.

•

Date list: Exit to 72-frame playback.

Thumbnail list: Zoom in on highlighted picture.

•

Date list: View first picture taken on selected date.

Thumbnail list: View highlighted picture.

Highlight dates/

Highlight images

•

Date list: Highlight date.

Thumbnail list: Highlight picture.

Delete highlighted

photo(s)

•

Date list: Delete all pictures taken on selected date.

Thumbnail list: Delete highlighted picture (pg. 140).

Change protect

status of highlighted

photo

See page 139 for more information.

Return to shooting

mode

Monitor will turn off. Photographs can be taken

immediately.

Display menus

See page 159 for more information.

137

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom

Press the X button to zoom in on the image displayed in full-frame playback or on the

image currently highlighted in thumbnail or calendar playback. The following

operations can be performed while zoom is in effect:

Use

Description

Press X to zoom in to maximum of

approximately 27 × (large images),

Zoom in or out

X / W

20 × (medium images) or 13 × (small

images). Press W to zoom out. While

photo is zoomed in, use multi selector

to view areas of image not visible in

monitor. Keep multi selector pressed

to scroll rapidly to other areas of frame. Navigation window is

displayed when zoom ratio is altered; area currently visible in

monitor is indicated by yellow border.

Faces (up to 10) detected during zoom

are indicated by white borders in

View other

areas of image

navigation window. Rotate sub-

command dial to scroll display to faces

without changing zoom ratio.

Select faces

Cancel zoom

Cancel zoom and return to full-frame playback.

View other

images

Rotate main command dial to view same location in other

images at current zoom ratio.

Changeprotect

status

See page 139 for more information.

Return to

shooting mode

Monitor will turn off. Photographs can be taken immediately.

See page 159 for more information.

Display menus

138

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Protecting Photographs from Deletion

In full-frame, zoom, thumbnail, and calendar playback, the L button can be used to

protect photographs from accidental deletion. Protected files can not be deleted

using the O button or the Delete option in the playback menu, and have DOS “read-

only” status when viewed on a Windows computer. Note that protected images will

be deleted when the memory card is formatted (pp. 30, 202).

To protect a photograph:

1 Select an image.

Display the image in full-frame playback or playback zoom or highlight it in the

thumbnail list.

2 Press the L button.

The photograph will be marked with a P icon.

To remove protection from the photograph so

that it can be deleted, display the photograph or

highlight it in the thumbnail list and then press

the L button.

A ^{Removing Protection from All Images}

To remove protection from all images in the folder or folders currently selected in the

Playback folder menu, press the L and O buttons together for about two seconds.

139

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Deleting Individual Photographs

To delete the photograph displayed in full-frame playback or the photograph

highlighted in the thumbnail list, press the O button. Once deleted, photographs can

not be recovered.

1 Select an image.

Display the image or highlight it in the thumbnail list.

2 Press the O button.

A confirmation dialog will be displayed.

Full-frame playback

Thumbnail playback

To delete the photograph, press the O button again. To

exit without deleting the photograph, press the K

button.

A ^{See Also}

To delete multiple images, use the Delete option in the playback menu (pg. 162). Use calendar

playback to delete all pictures taken on a selected date (pg. 136).

140

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pictmotion

The Pictmotion option in the playback menu (pg. 160) is used

to create and view slide shows with custom transitions and

background music. The following options are available:

Option

Description

Start

View the completed Pictmotion show.

Select pictures Choose pictures for the Pictmotion show.

Background music Choose background music.

Effects

Choose the transitions between pictures.

❚❚Choosing Pictures

To select the pictures that will be included in the Pictmotion

show, choose Select pictures in the Pictmotion menu. The

following options will be displayed:

Option

Q Selected

Description

Select individual pictures for the show.

Select a date. All pictures taken on the selected

date will appear in the show.

n Select date

Create a show using all the pictures in the current

playback folder.

R All

Only pictures in the folder currently selected in the Playback folders (pg. 162) menu

can be included in the show. Hidden pictures and pictures that can not be viewed on

the camera will not be displayed.

A ^Movies

Pictmotion shows can include movies, but only the first few seconds of each movie will be

displayed.

❚❚Choosing Background Music

To choose background music for the Pictmotion show, select

Background music in the Pictmotion menu. Choose from

High-speed, Emotional, Natural, Up-tempo, and Relaxed.

❚❚Transitions

To choose the transitions between pictures in the Pictmotion show, select Effects in

the Pictmotion menu. Choose from Zoom bounce, Zoom in/out, Blend, Wipe, and

Zoom out fade.

141

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

❚❚Viewing the Pictmotion Show

To view the show, highlight Start in the Pictmotion menu and

press J. The following operations can be performed while the

show is in progress:

Use

Description

Pause show (see below).

Pause slide show

Raise volume

Lower volume

Exit to playback

Press X and W to raise and lower volume.

See page 159 for more information.

Exit to playback

mode

End show and return to playback mode.

Exit to shooting

mode

Press shutter-release button halfway to

return to shooting mode.

A dialog shown at right is displayed when the show ends or

when the J button is pressed to pause playback. Select Restart

to restart (if the show was paused, it will resume from the next

picture) or Exit to return to the playback menu.

A ^Transitions

Depending on the size of the images, transitions may not be displayed.

142

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Slide Shows

The Slide show option in the playback menu (pg. 164) is used to display a slide show

of the pictures in the current playback folder (pg. 162). Hidden images (pg. 162) are

not displayed.

Option

Description

Start

Start slide show.

Frame interval Choose how long each picture will be displayed.

To start the slide show, highlight Start in the slide show menu and press J. The

following operations can be performed while the slide show is in progress:

Use

Description

Skip back/skip ahead

Press 4to return to previous frame, 2to skip to next frame.

View additional photo

info

Change photo info displayed (pg. 129).

Pause slide show

Exit to playback menu

Exit to playback mode

Pause show (see below).

See page 159 for more information.

End show and return to playback mode.

Press shutter-release button halfway to return to shooting

mode.

Exit to shooting mode

A dialog shown at right is displayed when the show ends or

when the J button is pressed to pause playback. Select Restart

to restart (if the show was paused, it will resume from the next

slide) or Exit to return to the playback menu.

143

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

144

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Connections

This chapter describes how to copy photographs to a computer, how to print

pictures, and how to view them on a television set.

Viewing Photographs on TV........................................................................................ 146

Standard Definition Devices ................................................................................................... 146

High-Definition Devices ........................................................................................................... 147

Connecting to a Computer .......................................................................................... 148

Before Connecting the Camera ............................................................................................. 148

Connecting the Camera............................................................................................................ 149

Printing Photographs ................................................................................................... 150

145

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Viewing Photographs on TV

The supplied EG-D2 audio video cable can be used to connect the camera to a

television or VCR for playback or recording. A type C mini-pin High-Definition

Multimedia Interface (HDMI) cable (available separately from third-party suppliers)

can be used to connect the camera to high-definition video devices.

Standard Definition Devices

To connect the camera to a standard television:

1 Turn the camera off.

Always turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting the video cable.

2 Connect the supplied audio video cable as shown.

Audio (white)

Video (yellow)

Connect to

camera

video device

3 Tune the television to the video channel.

4 Turn the camera on and press the K button.

During playback, images will be displayed both in the camera monitor and on

the television screen.

A ^{Video Mode (pg. 203)}

Be sure that the video standard matches the standard used in the video device. Note that

resolution will drop when images are output on a PAL device.

A ^{Television Playback}

Use of an EH-5a or EH-5 AC adapter (available separately) is recommended for extended

playback. When the EH-5a or EH-5 is connected, the camera monitor-off delay will be fixed at

ten minutes and the exposure meters will no longer turn off automatically. Note that the

edges may not be visible when photographs are viewed on a television screen.

146

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

High-Definition Devices

The camera can be connected to HDMI devices using a type C mini-pin HDMI cable

(available separately from third-party suppliers).

1 Turn the camera off.

Always turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting an HDMI cable.

2 Connect the HDMI cable as shown.

Connect to

camera

Connect to high-

definition device

(choose cable with

connector for

connected device)

3 Tune the device to the HDMI channel.

4 Turn the camera on and press the K button.

During playback, images will be displayed on the high-definition television or

monitor screen; the camera monitor will remain off.

A ^{HDMI (pg. 203)}

At the default setting of Auto, the camera automatically selects the appropriate HDMI format

for the high-definition device. The HDMI format can be chosen using the HDMI option in the

setup menu (pg. 203).

147

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Connecting to a Computer

This section describes how to use the supplied UC-E4 USB cable to connect the

camera to a computer.

Before Connecting the Camera

Before connecting the camera, install the software on the supplied Software Suite CD

(see the Install Guide for more information). To ensure that data transfer is not

interrupted, be sure the camera battery is fully charged. If in doubt, charge the

battery before use or use an EH-5a or EH-5 AC adapter (available separately).

❚❚Supported Operating Systems

The camera can be connected to computers running the following operating

systems:

•

Windows: Windows Vista Service Pack 1 (32-bit Home Basic/Home Premium/

Business/Enterprise/Ultimate) and Windows XP Service Pack 3 (Home Edition/

Professional). Users of Windows 2000 Professional Service Pack 4 can transfer

pictures by inserting the camera memory card in a card reader or card slot.

Macintosh: Mac OS X (version 10.3.9, 10.4.11, 10.5.3)

•

See the websites listed on page xviii for the latest information on supported

operating systems.

❚❚Supplied Software

Nikon Transfer is used to copy photographs from the camera to the computer, where

they can be viewed using ViewNX (Nikon Transfer can also be used to back up

photographs and embed information in photographs as they are transferred, while

ViewNX can be used to sort photographs, convert images to different file formats,

and perform simple editing on NEF/RAW photographs).

D ^{Connecting Cables}

Be sure the camera is off when connecting or disconnecting interface cables. Do not use force

or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle.

D ^{During Transfer}

Do not turn the camera off or disconnect the USB cable while transfer is in progress.

A ^{Camera Control Pro 2}

Camera Control Pro 2 (available separately; pg. 240) can be used to control the camera from a

computer. When Camera Control Pro 2 is running, “c” will be displayed in the control panel.

148

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Connecting the Camera

Connect the camera using the supplied UC-E4 USB cable.

1 Turn the camera off.

Power switch

2 Turn the computer on.

Turn the computer on and wait for it to start up.

3 Connect the USB cable.

Connect the USB cable as shown. Do not use force or attempt to insert the

connectors at an angle.

D ^{USB Hubs}

Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not connect the cable via a USB hub or

keyboard.

4 Turn the camera on.

5 Transfer photographs.

Nikon Transfer will start automatically; click the Start Transfer button to

transfer photographs (for more information on using Nikon Transfer, select

Nikon Transfer help from the Nikon Transfer Help menu).

6 Turn the camera off and disconnect the USB cable when transfer ends.

Nikon Transfer will close automatically when transfer is complete.

149

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Printing Photographs

JPEG photographs can be printed by any of the following methods:

• Connect the camera to a printer and print photographs directly from the camera

(see below).

• Insert the camera memory card in a printer equipped with a card slot (see the

printer manual for details). If the printer supports DPOF (pg. 274), photographs

can be selected for printing using Print set (DPOF) (pg. 157).

• Take the camera memory card to a developer or digital printer center. If the center

supports DPOF (pg. 274), photographs can be selected for printing using Print set

(DPOF) (pg. 157).

• Transfer pictures (pg. 148) and print them from a computer using ViewNX

(supplied; pg. 148) or Capture NX 2 (available separately; pg. 240).

NEF (RAW) photographs can only be printed using ViewNX or Capture NX 2 as

described above or by printing JPEG copies created using the NEF (RAW) processing

option in the retouch menu (pg. 220).

To print selected JPEG pictures on a PictBridge printer via a direct USB connection,

follow the steps below.

Take photographs

Select photographs for printing

using Print set (DPOF) (pg. 157)

Connect camera to printer (pg. 151)

Print photographs

one at a time

(pg. 151)

Print multiple

photographs

(pg. 153)

Create index prints

(pg. 156)

Disconnect USB cable

A ^{Printing Via Direct USB Connection}

Be sure the battery is fully charged or use an optional EH-5a or EH-5 AC adapter. When taking

photographs to be printed via direct USB connection in P, S, A, and M modes, set Color space to

sRGB (pg. 167).

150

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

❚❚Connecting the Printer

Connect the camera using the supplied UC-E4 USB cable.

1 Turn the camera off.

2 Connect the USB cable.

Turn the printer on and connect the USB cable as shown. Do not use force or

attempt to insert the connectors at an angle.

D^{USB Hubs}

Connect the camera directly to the printer; do not connect the cable via a USB hub or

keyboard.

3 Turn the camera on.

A welcome screen will be displayed in the monitor, followed by a PictBridge

playback display.

❚❚Printing Pictures One at a Time

1 Select a picture.

Press 4or 2to view additional pictures, or

press 1or 3to view photo information (pg.

129). Press the X button to zoom in on the

current frame (pg. 138; press K to exit zoom).

To view six pictures at a time, press the W

button. Use the multi selector to highlight

pictures, or press X to display the highlighted

picture full frame.

151

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2 Display printing options.

Press J to display PictBridge printing options.

3 Adjust printing options.

Press 1or 3to highlight an option and press 2to select.

Option

Description

Menu of page sizes will be displayed (options not

supported by current printer are not listed). Press 1or

3to choose page size (to print at default page size for

current printer, select Printer default), then press J

to select and return to previous menu.

Page size

Menu shown at right will be displayed. Press 1or 3to

choose number of copies (maximum 99), then press J

to select and return to previous menu.

No. of

copies

Menu shown at right will be displayed. Press 1or 3to

choose print style from Printer default (print using

current printer settings), Print with border (print

photo with white border), or No border, then press J

to select and return to previous menu. Only options

supported by current printer will be displayed.

Border

Menu shown at right will be displayed. Press 1or 3to

choose Printer default (print using current printer

Time settings), Print time stamp (print time and date of

stamp recording on photo), or No time stamp, then press J

to select and return to previous menu. Only options

supported by current printer will be displayed.

Menu shown at right will be displayed. To exit without

cropping picture, highlight No cropping and press J.

To crop picture, highlight Crop and press 2.

Cropping

If Crop is selected, dialog shown at right will be

displayed. Press X to increase size of crop, W to

decrease. Choose position of crop using multi selector

and press J. Note that print quality may drop if small

crops are printed at large sizes.

152

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 Start printing.

Select Start printing and press J to start

printing. To cancel before all copies have been

printed, press J.

❚❚Printing Multiple Pictures

1 Display the PictBridge menu.

Press the G button in the PictBridge playback display

(see Step 3 on page 151).

G button

2 Choose an option.

Highlight one of the following options and

press 2.

•Print select: Select pictures for printing.

•Select date: Print one copy of all the pictures

taken on a selected date.

•Print (DPOF): Print an existing print order created with the Print set (DPOF)

option in the playback menu (pg. 160). The current print order will be

displayed in Step 3.

To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on the memory card, select Index

print. See page 156 for more information.

153

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3 Select pictures or choose a date.

If you chose Print select or Print (DPOF) in Step 2,

use the multi selector to scroll through the

pictures on the memory card. To display the

current picture full screen, press the X button.

To select the current picture for printing, press

the W button and press 1. The picture will be

marked with a Z icon and the number of prints

will be set to 1. Keeping the W button pressed,

press 1or 3to specify the number of prints (up

to 99; to deselect the picture, press 3when the

number of prints is 1). Continue until all the

desired pictures have been selected.

W button

If you chose Select date in Step 2, press 1or 3to

highlight a date and press 2to select. To view

the pictures taken on the selected date, press

W. Use the multi selector to scroll through the

pictures, or press X to view the current picture

full screen.

4 Display printing options.

Press J to display PictBridge printing options.

154

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 Adjust printing options.

Press 1or 3to highlight an option and press 2to select.

Option

Description

Menu of page sizes will be displayed (pg. 152; options not supported by current

Page printer are not listed). Press 1or 3to choose page size (to print at default page

size size for current printer, select Printer default), then press J to select and return

to previous menu.

Menu of border options will be displayed (pg. 152; options not supported by

current printer are not listed). Press 1or 3to choose print style from Printer

default (print at current printer settings), Print with border (print photo with

Border

white border), or No border, then press J to select and return to previous menu.

Menu of time stamp options will be displayed (pg. 152; options not supported

by current printer are not listed). Press 1or 3to choose Printer default (print

at current printer settings), Print time stamp (print time and date of recording

on photo), or No time stamp, then press J to select and return to previous

Time

stamp

menu.

6 Start printing.

Select Start printing and press J to start

printing. To cancel before all copies have been

printed, press J.

D ^{Selecting Photographs for Printing}

NEF (RAW) photographs (pg. 62) can not be selected for printing. JPEG copies of NEF (RAW)

images can be created using the NEF (RAW) processing option in the retouch menu.

A ^{See Also}

See page 250 for information on what to do if an error occurs during printing.

155

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

❚❚Creating Index Prints

To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on the memory card, select Index print

in Step 2 of “Printing Multiple Pictures” (pg. 153). Note that if the memory card

contains more than 256 pictures, only the first 256 images will be printed.

1 Select Index print.

Selecting Index print in the PictBridge menu

(pg. 153) displays the images on the memory

card as shown at right.

2 Display printing options.

Press J to display PictBridge printing options.

3 Adjust printing options.

Choose page size, border, and time stamp options as described on page 147 (a

warning will be displayed if the selected page size is too small).

4 Start printing.

Select Start printing and press J to start

printing. To cancel before all copies have been

printed, press J.

156

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

❚❚Creating a DPOF Print Order: Print Set

The Print set (DPOF) option in the playback menu is used to create digital “print

orders” for PictBridge-compatible printers and devices that support DPOF. Selecting

Print set (DPOF) from the playback menu displays the menu shown in Step 1.

1 Choose Select/set.

Highlight Select/set and press 2.

2 Select pictures.

Use the multi selector to scroll through the

pictures on the memory card. To display the

current picture in full screen, press X button. To

select the current picture for printing, press the

W button and press 1. The picture will be

marked with a Z icon and the number of prints

will be set to 1. Keeping the W button pressed,

press 1or 3to specify the number of prints (up

to 99; to deselect the picture, press 3when the

number of prints is 1). Press J when all the

desired pictures have been selected.

W button

3 Select imprint options.

Highlight the following options and press 2to

toggle the highlighted option on or off (to

complete the print order without including this

information, proceed to Step 4).

•Data imprint: Print shutter speed and aperture on all pictures in print order.

•Imprint date: Print date of recording on all pictures in print order.

4 Complete the print order.

Highlight Done and press J to complete the

print order.

157

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

D ^{Print Set (DPOF)}

To print the current print order when the camera is connected to a PictBridge printer, select

Print (DPOF) in the PictBridge menu and follow the steps in “Printing Multiple Pictures” to

modify and print the current order (pg. 153). DPOF date and data imprint options are not

supported when printing via direct USB connection; to print the date of recording on

photographs in the current print order, use the PictBridge Time stamp option.

The Print set (DPOF) option can not be used if there is not enough space on the memory card

to store the print order.

NEF (RAW) photographs (pg. 62) can not be selected using this option. JPEG copies of NEF

(RAW) images can be created using the NEF (RAW) processing option in the retouch menu.

Print orders may not print correctly if images are deleted using a computer or other device

after the print order is created.

158

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Menu Guide

The current menu is displayed by pressing the G button; to select from the menus

listed below, press 4. This chapter describes the options available in the menus

below.

D The Playback Menu: Managing Images ............................................................... 160

C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options............................................................... 165

A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings................................................. 171

B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup.............................................................................. 202

N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies................................................ 209

m Recent Settings/O My Menu................................................................................... 224

159

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

D The Playback Menu:

Managing Images

The playback menu contains the options listed below. To display the playback menu,

press G and press 4to highlight the tab for current menu, then press 1or 3to

highlight the playback menu tab; for more information, see page 19.

Option

See page

162

Option

See page

163

141

Delete

Rotate tall

Pictmotion

Slide show

Playback folder

Hide image

162

143

Display mode

Image review

163

Print set (DPOF)

157

Selecting Multiple Pictures

To select multiple pictures for Delete (pg. 162), Hide image (pg. 162), Pictmotion

(pg. 163), and direct printing (pg. 150):

❚❚Thumbnail Selection

To choose pictures from a list of thumbnails, select the “Selected,” “Select/Set,” “Print

select,” or “Print (DPOF)” option and follow the steps below.

1 Highlight a picture.

Use the multi selector to highlight a picture (to

view the highlighted picture full screen, press

and hold the X button).

2 Select the highlighted picture.

W button

Press the W button to select the

highlighted picture. Selected

pictures are marked by an icon.

When selecting pictures for printing,

press the W button and press 1or

3to choose the number of copies.

3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select additional pictures.

To deselect a picture, highlight it and press the W button.

160

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 Press J to complete the operation.

A confirmation dialog will be displayed;

highlight Yes and press J.

❚❚Date Selection

To choose a date, select the “Select date” option and follow the steps below.

1 Highlight a date.

Press 1or 3to highlight a date.

To view the pictures taken on the

highlighted date, press W. Use the

multi selector to scroll through the

pictures, or press X to view the

current picture full screen. Press W

to return to the date list.

X button

2 Select the highlighted date.

Press 2in the date list or J in the thumbnail list

to select all pictures taken on the highlighted

date. Selected dates are marked with a M icon.

3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select additional pictures.

To deselect a date, highlight it and press 2. To deselect a selected date in the

thumbnail list, press J.

4 Press J to complete the operation.

A confirmation dialog will be displayed;

highlight Yes and press J.

161

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Delete

The delete menu contains the following options:

Option

Description

Q Selected

Delete selected pictures.

n Select date Delete all pictures taken on a selected date.

R All

Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected for playback.

D ^{Protected and Hidden Images}

Images that are protected or hidden will not be deleted.

Playback Folder

Choose a folder for playback:

Option

Description

Only photos in the folder currently selected for Active folder in the shooting menu

are displayed during playback. This option is selected automatically when a photo

is taken. If a memory card is inserted and this option selected before photos have

been taken, a message stating that the folder contains no images will be displayed

during playback. Select All to begin playback.

Current

(default)

All

Pictures in all folders will be visible during playback.

Hide Image

Hide or reveal selected pictures. Hidden pictures are visible only in the Hide image

menu and can only be deleted by formatting the memory card.

Option

Q Select/set

Description

Hide or reveal selected pictures.

n Select date Hide or reveal all pictures taken on a selected date.

R Deselect all? Reveal all pictures.

D ^{Protected and Hidden Images}

Revealing a protected image will also remove protection from the image.

162

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Display Mode

Choose the information available in the playback photo

information display (pg. 129). Press 1or 3to highlight an

option, then press 2to select the option for the photo

information display. A M appears next to selected items; to

deselect, highlight and press 2. To return to the playback

menu, highlight Done and press J.

Option

Description

Detailed photo info

Highlights are shown in photo information display. Very bright areas blink on

and off.

Highlights

RGB

histogram

Red, green, and blue histograms are displayed in photo information display.

Shooting data pages (including camera name, metering, exposure, focal

length, white balance, and image options) appear in photo information

display.

Data

Image Review

Choose whether pictures are automatically displayed in the monitor immediately

after shooting.

Option

Description

On (default) Pictures are automatically displayed in the monitor after shooting.

Off

Pictures can only be displayed by pressing K button.

Rotate Tall

Choose whether to rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures for display during

playback. Note that because the camera itself is already in the appropriate

orientation during shooting, images are not rotated automatically during image

review (pg. 128).

Option

Description

“Tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures are automatically rotated for display in the

camera monitor. Pictures taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation

(pg. 205) will be displayed in “wide” (landscape) orientation.

(default)

Off

“Tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures are displayed in “wide” (landscape) orientation.

Pictmotion

Create and view slide shows with custom transitions and background music (pg.

141).

163

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Slide Show

Play pictures back one at a time in a simple automated slide show (pg. 143).

Print Set (DPOF)

Choose Select/set to select pictures for printing on a DPOF-compatible device (pg.

157). Choose Deselect all? to remove all pictures from the current print order.

164

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C The Shooting Menu:

Shooting Options

The shooting menu contains the options listed below. To display the shooting menu,

press G and press 4to highlight the tab for current menu, then press 1or 3to

highlight the shooting menu tab; for more information, see page 19.

Option

Set Picture Control

Manage Picture Control

Image quality

See page

108

113

Option

See page

167

168

169

Color space

Long exp. NR

High ISO NR

Active folder

Image size

White balance

ISO sensitivity settings

Active D-Lighting

166

119

Multiple exposure

Movie setting

121

170

Set Picture Control

Select from the Picture Controls provided with the camera to instantly adjust image

processing settings (pg 108). This option is available in P, S, A, and M modes only.

Manage Picture Control

Save and modify custom Picture Control combinations, or copy custom Picture

Controls to or from the memory card (pg. 113). This option is available in P, S, A, and M

modes only.

Image Quality

Choose image quality (pg. 62). This option is available in all modes.

Image Size

Choose the size at which pictures are recorded (pg. 63). This option is available in all

modes.

White Balance

Adjust white balance settings (pg. 95). This option is available in P, S, A, and M modes

only.

165

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ISO Sensitivity Settings

Adjust ISO sensitivity (pg. 74). This option is available in all modes.

❚❚ISO Sensitivity Auto Control (P, S, and A Modes Only)

If Off (the default setting) is chosen for ISO sensitivity auto

control, ISO sensitivity will remain fixed at the value selected by

the user (see page 74). When On is chosen, ISO sensitivity will

automatically be adjusted if optimal exposure can not be

achieved at the value selected by the user (flash level is

adjusted appropriately). The maximum value for auto ISO

sensitivity can be selected using the Maximum sensitivity

option in the ISO sensitivity auto control menu (choose lower

values to prevent noise; the minimum value for auto ISO

sensitivity is automatically set to ISO 200). In exposure modes

P and A, sensitivity will only be adjusted if underexposure would

result at the shutter speed selected for Minimum shutter

speed. Slower shutter speeds will be used only if optimum exposure can not be

achieved at the ISO sensitivity value selected for Maximum sensitivity.

When On is selected, the control panel and viewfinder show

ISO-AUTO. These indictors blink when sensitivity is altered from

the value selected by the user.

A ^{Auto ISO Sensitivity Control}

Noise is more likely at higher sensitivities. Use the High ISO NR option in the shooting menu

to reduce noise (see page 168). Foreground subjects may be underexposed in photos taken

with the flash at slow shutter speeds, in daylight, or against a bright background. Choose a

flash mode other than slow sync or select exposure mode A or M and choose a larger aperture.

Note that when the flash is used, the camera uses the shutter speed selected for Custom

Setting e1 (Flash shutter speed, pg. 185) in place of the value selected for Minimum shutter

speed.

Active D-Lighting

This option can be used to prevent loss of detail in highlights and shadows (pg. 119).

The default setting is Auto. This option is available in P, S, A, and M modes only.

166

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Color Space

The color space determines the gamut of colors available for color reproduction.

Choose a color space according to how photographs will be processed on leaving the

camera. This option is available in all modes.

Option

Description

Choose for photographs that will be printed or used “as is,” with no

further modification.

W sRGB (default)

This color space is capable of expressing a wider gamut of colors than

sRGB, making it the preferred choice for images that will be extensively

processed or retouched.

X Adobe RGB

A ^{Color Space}

Color spaces define the correspondence between colors and the numeric values that

represent them in a digital image file. The sRGB color space is widely used, while the Adobe

RGB color space is typically used in publishing and commercial printing. sRGB is

recommended when taking photographs that will be printed without modification or viewed

in applications that do not support color management, or when taking photographs that will

be printed with ExifPrint, the direct printing option on some household printers, or kiosk

printing or other commercial print services. Adobe RGB photographs can also be printed using

these options, but colors will not be as vivid.

JPEG photographs taken in the Adobe RGB color space are DCF compliant; applications and

printers that support DCF will select the correct color space automatically. If the application or

device does not support DCF, select the appropriate color space manually. For more

information, see the documentation provided with the application or device.

A ^{Nikon Software}

ViewNX (supplied) and Capture NX 2 (available separately) automatically select the correct

color space when opening photographs created with this camera.

Long Exp. NR (Long Exposure Noise Reduction)

Choose whether to reduce noise in pictures taken at slow shutter speeds. This option

is available in all modes.

Option

Description

Photographs taken at shutter speeds slower than 8 s

are processed to reduce noise. The time required for

processing is roughly equal to the current shutter

speed; during processing, “l m” will blink in the

shutter speed/aperture displays and photographs can

not be taken. In continuous release mode, frame rates

will slow and the capacity of the memory buffer will

drop. Noise reduction is not visible in pictures played

back before processing is complete; noise reduction will not be performed if

the camera is turned off before processing is complete.

Off (default) Long exposure noise reduction off.

167

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

High ISO NR

Photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities can be processed to reduce “noise.” This

option is available in all modes.

Option

Description

S High

Noise reduction is performed at ISO sensitivities of ISO 800 and higher. While

Normal photographs are being processed, the capacity of the memory buffer will

(default) drop. Choose the amount of noise reduction performed from High, Normal,

and Low.

U Low

Noise reduction is only performed at sensitivities of Hi 0.3 and higher. The

amount of noise reduction is less than the amount performed when Low is

selected for High ISO NR.

Off

168

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Active Folder

Create, rename, or delete folders, or choose the folder in which subsequent

photographs will be stored. This option is available in all modes.

•

Select folder: Choose the folder in which subsequent photographs will be stored.

NCD90

(default folder)

Current folder

Other folders

(in alphabetical order)

•

New: Create a new folder and name it as described below.

Rename: Select a folder from the list and rename it as described below.

Delete: Delete all empty folders on the memory card.

❚❚Naming and Renaming Folders

Folder names can be up to five characters long. To

move the cursor in the name area, press the W button

and press 4or 2. To enter a new letter at the current

cursor position, use the multi selector to highlight the

desired character in the keyboard area and press the X

Keyboard

area

Name area

button. To delete the character at the current cursor position, press the O button.

Press J to save changes and return to the shooting menu, or press G to exit

without creating a new folder or changing the folder name.

D ^{Folder Names}

On the memory card, folder names are preceded by a three-digit folder number assigned

automatically by the camera (e.g., 100NCD90). Each folder can contain up to 999 photographs.

During shooting, pictures are stored in the highest-numbered folder with the selected name.

If a photograph is taken when the current folder is full or contains a photograph numbered

9999, the camera will create a new folder by adding one to the current folder number (e.g.,

101NCD90). The camera treats folders with the same name but different folder numbers as the

same folder. For example, if the folder NIKON is selected for Active folder, photographs in all

folders named NIKON (100NIKON, 101NIKON, 102NIKON, etc.) will be visible when Current is

selected for Playback folder (pg. 162). Renaming changes all folders with the same name but

leaves the folder numbers intact.

169

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Multiple Exposure

Create a single photograph from two to three exposures (pg. 121). This option is

available in P, S, A, and M modes only.

Movie setting

Choose a frame size and sound options for movies (pg. 50). This option is available in

all modes.

❚❚Quality

Choose a frame size.

Option

Description

Record movies at a frame rate of 24 fps. Each frame is 1280 × 720

pixels in size. Choose for higher quality.

Record movies at a frame rate of 24 fps. Each frame is 640 × 424

pixels in size.

Record movies at a frame rate of 24 fps. Each frame is 320 × 216

pixels in size. Choose for reduced file size.

1280×720 (16:9)

640×424 (3:2)

(default)

320×216 (3:2)

❚❚Sound

Choose On (the default setting) to record monaural sound with movies, Off to record

silent movies.

170

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

A Custom Settings:

Fine-Tuning Camera Settings

Custom Setting groups

Custom Settings are used to customize camera

settings to suit individual preferences. To display

the Custom Settings menu, press G and press 4

to highlight the tab for current menu, then press 1

or 3to highlight the Custom Settings tab; for

more information, see page 19.

Main menu

A: Reset custom

settings (pg. 172)

171

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The following Custom Settings are available:

Custom Setting

Reset custom settings

Autofocus

Page

172

Custom Setting

Shooting/display

d4 Viewfinder warning display

d5 Screen tips

d6 CL mode shooting speed

d7 File number sequence

d8 Shooting info display

d9 LCD illumination

d10 Exposure delay mode

d11 Flash warning

Page

181

182

183

184

a1 AF-area mode

a2 Center focus point

172

174

175

176

a3 Built-in AF-assist illuminator

a4 AF point illumination

a5 Focus point wrap-around

a6 AE-L/AF-L for MB-D80

a7 Live view autofocus

Metering/exposure

d12 MB-D80 battery type

b1 EV steps for exposure cntrl.

b2 Easy exposure compensation

b3 Center-weighted area

177

178

Bracketing/flash

e1 Flash shutter speed

e2 Flash cntrl for built-in flash

e3 Modeling flash

e4 Auto bracketing set

e5 Auto FP

e6 Bracketing order

f1 D switch

f2 OK button (shooting mode)

f3 Assign FUNC. button

f4 Assign AE-L/AF-L button

f5 Customize command dials

f6 No memory card?

185

191

195

b4 Fine tune optimal exposure

Timers/AE lock

c1 Shutter-release button AE-L

c2 Auto meter-off delay

c3 Self-timer

c4 Monitor off delay

c5 Remote on duration

179

180

Controls

196

197

200

201

Shooting/display

d1 Beep

d2 Viewfinder grid display

d3 ISO display and adjustment

180

181

f7 Reverse indicators

A: Reset Custom Settings

L Choose whether to restore default settings for the current Custom Settings. See

page 260 for a list of default settings. Custom Settings are not reset when a two-

button reset is performed.

Option

Description

Yes Restore defaults for the current Custom Settings (pg. 260).

No Exit without changing Custom Settings.

172

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

a: Autofocus

a1: AF-area Mode

This option (available in all shooting modes) determines how the focus point for

autofocus is selected. Choose from the following options:

Option

Description

User selects focus point using multi selector; camera focuses on subject in

Single point selected focus point only. Use with stationary subjects. Default setting

for n mode.

In AF-A and AF-C autofocus modes, user selects focus point manually, but

camera will focus based on information from surrounding focus points if

Dynamic

subject briefly leaves selected point. Use with erratically moving

area

subjects. In AF-S autofocus mode, user selects focus point manually; camera

focuses on subject in selected focus point only. Default for m mode.

Camera automatically detects subject and selects focus point. If type G or

D lens is used, camera can distinguish human subjects from background

for improved subject detection. Default for i, j, k, l, o, P, S, A, and M

Auto-area

modes.

In AF-A and AF-C autofocus modes, user selects focus point using multi selector.

If user changes composition after focusing, camera uses 3D-tracking to

select new focus point and keep focus locked on original subject while

shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Use to recompose

3D-tracking

photographs while shooting relatively static subjects. If subject leaves

(11 points)

viewfinder, remove your finger from shutter-release button and

recompose photograph with subject in selected focus point. In AF-S

autofocus mode, user selects focus point manually; camera focuses on

subject in selected focus point only.

The current setting is shown in the shooting information display

(pg. 10).

A ^{3D-tracking (11 Points)}

When the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the colors in the area surrounding the

focus point are stored in the camera. Consequently 3D-tracking may not produce the desired

results with subjects that are the same color as the background.

173

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

a2: Center Focus Point

This option (available in all shooting modes) determines the size of the center focus

point.

Option

Viewfinder display

Description

Normal zone

(default)

Focus on stationary subjects that can be easily framed

in the focus point.

Focus on moving subjects. Not available when Auto-

area is selected for Custom Setting a1 (AF-area

mode).

7 Wide zone

See page 54 for more information on focus settings.

a3: Built-in AF-assist Illuminator

Choose whether the built-in AF-assist illuminator lights to assist

the focus operation when lighting is poor. This option is

available in all shooting modes except l and m.

Option

Description

If the subject is poorly lit, the AF-assist illuminator will light to assist the focus

operation in single-servo AF (AF-S selected for autofocus mode, or single-servo AF

selected in AF-A autofocus mode) when Single point, Auto-area, or 3D-tracking

(11 points) is selected for Custom Setting a1 (AF-area mode) or when Custom

Setting a1 is set to Dynamic area and the center focus point is selected.

The AF-assist illuminator does not light to assist the focus operation. The camera

may not be able to focus using autofocus when lighting is poor.

(default)

Off

A ^{The AF-Assist Illuminator}

The AF-assist illuminator has a range of about 0.5–3.0 m (1 ft. 8 in.–9 ft. 10 in.); when using the

illuminator, use a lens with a focal length of 24–200 mm and remove the lens hood.

A ^{See Also}

See page 231 for restrictions on the lenses that can be used with AF assist.

174

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

a4: AF Point Illumination

Choose whether the active focus point is highlighted in red in the viewfinder. This

option is available in all shooting modes.

Option

Description

Auto The selected focus point is automatically highlighted as needed to establish

(default) contrast with the background.

The selected focus point is always highlighted, regardless of the brightness of the

background. Depending on the brightness of the background, the selected focus

point may be difficult to see.

Off

The selected focus point is not highlighted.

a5: Focus Point Wrap-Around

Choose whether focus-point selection “wraps around” from one edge of the

viewfinder to another. This option is available in all shooting modes.

Option

Description

Focus-point selection “wraps around” from top to

bottom, bottom to top, right to left, and left to right,

so that, for example, pressing 2when a focus point at

the right edge of the viewfinder display is highlighted

(q) selects the corresponding focus point at the left

edge of the display (w).

Wrap

The focus-area display is bounded by the outermost focus points so that, for

example, pressing 2when a focus point at the right edge of the display is selected

has no effect.

No wrap

(default)

175

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

a6: AE-L/AF-L for MB-D80

Choose the function assigned to the AE-L/AF-L

button on the optional MB-D80 battery pack. This

option is available in all shooting modes.

Option

AE/AF lock ^*

(default)

Description

Focus and exposure lock while the MB-D80 AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.

AE lock only ^*Exposure locks while the MB-D80 AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.

AF lock only ^*Focus locks while the MB-D80 AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.

Exposure locks when the MB-D80 AE-L/AF-L button is pressed, and

remains locked until the button is pressed a second time or the exposure

meters turn off.

Pressing the MB-D80 AE-L/AF-L button initiates autofocus.

Flash value for the built-in flash and optional SB-900, SB-800, SB-600,

SB-400, and SB-R200 flash units locks when the MB-D80 AE-L/AF-L

button is pressed (pg. 198), and remains locked until the button is

pressed a second time or the exposure meters turn off.

AE lock

(Hold)

A AF-ON ^*

FV lock

Focus point The focus point (pg. 56) can be selected by pressing the MB-D80 AE-L/

selection AF-L button and rotating the sub-command dial.

* Pressing 2when these options are highlighted displays a Focus point selection sub-menu.

If On is selected, the focus point can be chosen by pressing the MB-D80 AE-L/AF-L button

and rotating the sub-command dial.

a7: Live View Autofocus

This option (available in all shooting modes) determines how the focus point for

autofocus is selected in live view. Choose from the following options:

Mode

Description

The camera automatically detects and focuses on portrait subjects

facing camera. Use for portraits; default for k and o modes.

Use for hand-held shots of landscapes and other non-portrait subjects.

The focus point can be selected manually. Default for i, j, l, m, P, S, A,

and M modes.

Face priority

Wide area

(default)

Use for pin-point focus on a selected spot in the frame. A tripod is

recommended. Default setting for n mode.

Normal area

176

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

b: Metering/Exposure

b1: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl.

This option (available in all shooting modes) determines whether adjustments to

shutter speed, aperture, exposure compensation, flash compensation, and bracketing

are made in increments equivalent to ¹/3 EV or ¹/2 EV.

Option

Description

Changes to shutter speed, aperture, exposure compensation, and flash

compensation are in increments equivalent to ¹/3 EV. The bracketing increment

can be selected from ¹/3, ²/3, and 1 EV.

1/3 step

(default)

Changes to shutter speed, aperture, exposure compensation, and flash

I 1/2 step compensation are in increments equivalent to ¹/2 EV. The bracketing increment

can be selected from ¹/2 and 1 EV.

b2: Easy Exposure Compensation

This option (available in P, S, A, and M modes) controls whether the E button is needed

to set exposure compensation (pg. 90). If On is selected, the 0 at the center of the

exposure display will blink even when exposure compensation is set to 0.

Option

Description

Exposure compensation can be set by rotating one of the command dials (see note

below). Selected value does not change when exposure meters turn off, camera is

turned off, or Off is selected for Custom Setting b2.

Off

Exposure compensation is set by pressing the E button and rotating the main

(default) command dial.

A ^{Change Main/Sub}

The dial used to set exposure compensation when On is selected for Custom Setting b2 (Easy

exposure compensation) depends on the option selected for Custom Setting f5 (Customize

command dials) > Change main/sub (pg. 201).

Customize command dials > Change main/sub

Off (default)

Sub-command dial

Main command dial

Sub-command dial

Main command dial

Sub-command dial

N/A

177

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

b3: Center-Weighted Area

When calculating exposure, center-weighted metering

assigns the greatest weight to a circle in the center of the

frame. The diameter (φ) of this circle can be set to 6, 8, or

10 mm. This option is available in P, S, A, and M modes only.

Option

M φ 6 mm

L φ 8 mm (default)

N φ 10 mm

b4: Fine Tune Optimal Exposure

Use this option (available in all shooting modes) to fine-tune the exposure value

selected by the camera. Exposure can be fine tuned separately for each metering

method by from +1 to –1 EV in steps of ¹/6 EV.

D ^{Fine-Tuning Exposure}

Exposure can be fine-tuned separately for each Custom Settings bank and is not affected by

two-button resets. Note that as the exposure compensation (E) icon is not displayed, the only

way to determine how much exposure has been altered is to view the amount in the fine-

tuning menu. Exposure compensation (pg. 90) is preferred in most situations.

178

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

c: Timers/AE Lock

c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L

At the default setting of Off, exposure only locks when the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.

If On is selected, exposure will also lock when the shutter-release button is pressed

halfway. This option is available in all shooting modes.

c2: Auto Meter-off Delay

This option (available in all shooting modes) controls how long

the camera continues to meter exposure when no operations are

performed. Choose from 4 s, 6 s, 8 s, 16 s, 30 s, 1 minute,

5 minutes, 10 minutes, or 30 minutes. The shutter-speed and

aperture displays in the control panel and viewfinder turn off

automatically when the exposure meters turn off.

Option

4 s

6 s (default)

8 s

T 16 s

U 30 s

1 min.

5 min.

X 10 min.

Choose a shorter meter-off delay for longer battery life. When

the camera is powered by an optional EH-5a or EH-5 AC adapter,

the exposure meters will not turn off automatically.

Y 30 min.

c3: Self-Timer

This option (available in all shooting modes) controls the length

of the shutter release delay (Self-timer delay; see right) and the

number of shots (Number of shots; choose a value from 1–9)

taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed in self-

timer mode (at values other than 1, pictures will be taken at the

rate selected for ! mode; pg. 182).

Self-timer delay

2 s

5 s

c 10 s (default)

d 20 s

179

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

c4: Monitor off Delay

This option (available in all shooting modes) controls how long

the monitor remains on when no operations are performed

during playback, image review, or when menus or shooting

information is displayed. Choose from 4 s (the default for image

review), 10 s (the default for playback and shooting information),

20 s (the default for menus), 1 minute, 5 minutes, or 10 minutes.

Choose a shorter monitor-off delay for longer battery life.

Regardless of the setting chosen, the monitor remains on if no

operations are performed for about ten minutes when the

camera is powered by an optional EH-5a or EH-5 AC adapter.

Option

4 s

10 s

20 s

1 min.

5 min.

10 min.

c5: Remote on Duration

Option

1 min. (default)

5 min.

Choose how long the camera will wait for a signal from the

remote before cancelling delayed or quick-response remote

modes (pg. 68). Choose shorter times for longer battery life.

The default setting is one minute.

w 10 min.

x 15 min.

This option is available in all shooting modes.

d: Shooting/Display

d1: Beep

At the default setting of On, a beep will sound when the camera focuses in single-

servo AF (5 or when shooting stationary subjects in 4 autofocus mode), while

the release timer is counting down in self-timer and delayed remote modes (pg. 66,

68), or when a photograph is taken in quick-response remote mode (pg. 68). The

beep will not sound when Off is selected.

This option is available in all shooting modes. The current setting

is shown in the control panel: 3 is displayed when the beep is on,

2 when it is off.

180

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

d2: Viewfinder Grid Display

Choose On to display on-demand grid lines in the viewfinder for reference when

composing photographs. The default setting is Off. This option is available in all

shooting modes.

d3: ISO Display and Adjustment

Choose Show ISO sensitivity (y) or Show ISO/Easy ISO (z) to display the

current ISO sensitivity setting in the frame count displays in the control panel and

viewfinder. If Show ISO/Easy ISO (z⁾is selected, ISO sensitivity can be set by

rotating the sub-command dial (modes P and S) or main command dial (mode A).

Choose Show frame count (the default setting) to show the number of exposures

remaining in the frame count displays.

This option is available in all shooting modes.

d4: Viewfinder Warning Display

Choose On (the default setting) to display the following warnings in the viewfinder:

Icon

Description

Displayed when a monochrome Picture Control is selected.

Displayed when the battery is low.

Displayed when no memory card is inserted.

These warnings are not displayed if Off is selected. This option is available in all

shooting modes.

181

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

d5: Screen Tips

Choose On (the default setting) to display tips for items selected in the shooting

information display, Off to turn tip display off. This option is available in all shooting

modes.

d6: CL Mode Shooting Speed

This option (available in all shooting modes) determines the maximum frame

advance rate in ! (continuous low speed) release mode. Choose from values

between one and four frames per second (fps); the default setting is 3 fps. Note that

the frame advance rate may drop below the selected value at slow shutter speeds.

d7: File Number Sequence

When a photograph is taken, the camera names the file by adding one to the last file

number used. This option (available in all shooting modes) controls whether file

numbering continues from the last number used when a new folder is created, the

memory card is formatted, or a new memory card is inserted in the camera.

Option

Description

When a new folder is created, the memory card formatted, or a new memory

card inserted in the camera, file numbering continues from the last number

used or from the largest file number in the current folder, whichever is higher.

If a photograph is taken when the current folder contains a photograph

numbered 9999, a new folder will be created automatically and file numbering

will begin again from 0001.

File numbering is reset to 0001 when a new folder is created, the memory card

is formatted, or a new memory card is inserted in the camera. Note that a new

(default) folder is created automatically if a photograph is taken when the current folder

contains 999 photographs.

Off

Same as for On, except that the next photograph taken is assigned a file

number by adding one to the largest file number in the current folder. If the

folder is empty, file numbering is reset to 0001.

Reset

D ^{File Number Sequence}

If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains either 999 photographs or a photograph

numbered 9999, the shutter-release button will be disabled and no further photographs can

be taken. Choose Reset for Custom Setting d7 (File number sequence) and then either

format the current memory card or insert a new memory card.

182

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

d8: Shooting Info Display

At the default setting of v Auto, the color of the lettering in the information

display (pg. 10) will automatically change from black to white or white to black in

response to ambient lighting conditions. To always use the same color lettering,

select Manual and choose w Dark on light (black lettering) or x Light on dark

(white lettering). Monitor brightness will automatically be adjusted for maximum

contrast with the selected text color.

Dark on light

Light on dark

This option is available in all shooting modes.

d9: LCD Illumination

At the default setting of Off, the control panel backlight (LCD illuminator) will only

light while the power switch is in the D position. If On is selected, the control panel

will be illuminated while the exposure meters are active (pg. 35). Select Off for

increased battery life.

This option is available in all shooting modes.

d10: Exposure Delay Mode

At the default setting of Off, shutter is released when the shutter-release button is

pressed. In situations where the slightest camera movement can blur pictures, On

can be selected to delay shutter release until about 1 s after the shutter-release

button is pressed and the mirror is raised. This option is available in all shooting

modes.

d11: Flash Warning

In P, S, A, and M modes, the flash must be raised manually before use. If On (the default

setting) is selected for this option and lighting is poor, the flash-ready light (M) will

flicker in the viewfinder when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway to warn

that the built-in flash is required. No warning will be displayed if Off is selected. This

option is available in P, S, A, and M modes only.

183

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

d12: MB-D80 Battery Type

To ensure that the camera functions as expected when AA batteries are used in the

optional MB-D80 battery pack, match the option selected in this menu (available in

all shooting modes) to the type of batteries inserted in the battery pack. There is no

need to adjust this option when using EN-EL3e batteries.

Option

Description

1 LR6 (AA alkaline) (default) Select when using LR6 alkaline AA batteries.

2 HR6 (AA Ni-MH)

3 FR6 (AA lithium)

4 ZR6 (AA Ni-Mn)

Select when using HR6 Ni-MH AA batteries.

Select when using FR6 lithium AA batteries.

Select when using ZR6 Ni-Mn AA batteries.

A ^{Using AA Batteries}

EN-EL3e rechargeable Li-ion batteries are recommended for best performance. Fewer pictures

can be taken with AA batteries (pg. 275). The capacity of AA batteries drops sharply at

temperatures below 20 °C (68 °F) and varies with make and storage conditions; in some cases,

batteries may cease to function before their expiry date. Some AA batteries can not be used;

due to their performance characteristics and limited capacity, alkaline and nickel-manganese

batteries should only be used if no alternative is available and then only at warmer

temperatures. The camera shows the level of AA batteries as follows:

Control panel Viewfinder

Description

—

Batteries fully charged.

Low battery. Ready fresh batteries.

(blinks)

Battery exhausted; shutter release disabled. Change batteries.

Battery level for EN-EL3e rechargeable Li-ion batteries is displayed normally.

A ^{The MB-D80 Battery Pack}

The MB-D80 takes one or two EN-EL3e rechargeable Li-ion battery or six AA alkaline, Ni-MH,

lithium, or nickel manganese batteries (an EN-EL3e is supplied with the camera). Higher frame

rates are available with AA batteries; note, however, that in the case of AA batteries the frame

rate will decrease as battery level drops.

The shooting information display shows the type of battery inserted in

the MB-D80 as follows:

MB-D80 battery type display

Battery type

EN-EL3e rechargeable Li-ion battery

AA batteries

184

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

e: Bracketing/Flash

e1: Flash Shutter Speed

This option (available only in P and A modes) determines the slowest shutter speed

available when using front- or rear-curtain sync or red-eye reduction in modes P and

A (regardless of the setting chosen, shutter speeds can be as slow as 30 s in modes S

and M or at flash settings of slow sync, slow rear-curtain sync, or red-eye reduction

with slow sync). Options range from ¹/60 s (1/60 s, the default setting) to 30 s (30 s).

e2: Flash Cntrl for Built-in Flash

Choose the flash mode for the built-in flash. This option is available in P, S, A, and M

modes only.

Option

TTL

(default)

Description

Flash output is adjusted automatically in response to shooting conditions.

Choose the flash level (pg. 187).

Manual

Repeating The flash fires repeatedly while the shutter is open, producing a strobe-

flash

light effect (pg. 187).

Commander Use the built-in flash as a master flash controlling one or more remote

mode

optional flash units (pg. 188).

A ^{“Manual” and “Repeating Flash”}

Y icons blink in the control panel and viewfinder when these options are selected.

A ^{The SB-400}

When an optional SB-400 flash unit is attached and turned on, Custom

Setting e2 changes to Optional flash, allowing the flash control mode

for the SB-400 to be selected from TTL and Manual (Repeating flash

and Commander mode options are not available).

185

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

A ^{Flash Control Mode}

The shooting information display shows the flash control mode for the built-in flash (Built-in)

and for optional flash units attached to the camera accessory shoe (Optional) as follows:

Auto aperture (AA) ¹

Built-in Optional

Manual

i-TTL

Built-in

Optional

Built-in

Optional

TTL ²

—

Auto FP (pg. 195)

Repeating flash ²

Commander mode ²

—

1 Available with SB-900 and SB-800 only.

2 Flash control mode for built-in flash can be selected using Custom Setting e2 (Flash Cntrl

for Built-in Flash, pg. 185).

A ^{See Also}

See Custom Setting e5 (Auto FP, pg. 195) for information on flash sync speeds as fast as ¹/320 s.

186

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

❚❚Manual

Choose a flash level between Full and 1/128 (¹/128 of full power). At full power, the

built-in flash has a Guide Number of 18/59 (m/ft., ISO 200, 20°C/68°F).

❚❚Repeating Flash

The flash fires repeatedly while the shutter is open, producing a

strobe-light effect. Press 4or 2to highlight the following

options, 1or 3to change.

Option

Description

Output Choose flash output (expressed as a fraction of full power).

Choose the number of times the flash fires at the selected output. Note that

depending on shutter speed and the option selected for Frequency, the actual

Times

number of flashes may be less than selected.

Frequency Choose how often the flash fires per second.

A ^“Times”

The options available for Times are determined by flash

output.

Output Options available for Times

1/4

1/8

2–5

1/16

1/32

1/64

2–10

2–10, 15

2–10, 15, 20, 25

1/128 2–10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35

187

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

❚❚Commander Mode

Use the built-in flash as a master flash controlling one or more remote optional

SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, or SB-R200 flash units in up to two groups (A and B) using

advanced wireless lighting.

Selecting this option displays the menu shown at right. Press 4

or 2to highlight the following options, 1or 3to change.

Option

Built-in

flash

Description

Choose a flash mode for the built-in flash (commander flash).

i-TTL mode. Choose flash compensation from values between +3.0 and –3.0 EV in

increments of ¹/3 EV.

Choose the flash level from values between Full and 1/128 (¹/128 of full power).

The built-in flash does not fire, but the AF-assist illuminator lights. The built-in flash

must be raised so that it can emit monitor pre-flashes.

TTL

– –

Group A Choose a flash mode for all flash units in group A.

i-TTL mode. Choose flash compensation from values between +3.0 and –3.0 EV in

TTL

increments of ¹/3 EV.

Auto aperture (available only with SB-900 and SB-800 flash units). Choose flash

compensation from values between +3.0 and –3.0 EV in increments of ¹/3 EV.

Choose the flash level from values between Full and 1/128 (¹/128 of full power).

– – The flash units in this group do not fire.

Choose a flash mode for all flash units in group B. The options available are the

same as those listed for Group A, above.

Group B

Choose from channels 1–4. All flash units in both groups must be set to the same

channel.

Channel

Follow the steps below to take photographs in commander mode.

1 Adjust settings for the built-in flash.

Choose the flash control mode and output level for the

built-in flash. Note that output level can not be adjusted in

– – mode.

188

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2 Adjust settings for group A.

Choose the flash control mode and output level for the

flash units in group A.

3 Adjust settings for group B.

Choose the flash control mode and output level for the

flash units in group B.

4 Select the channel.

5 Press J.

6 Compose the shot.

Compose the shot and arrange the flash units as shown below. Note that the

maximum distance at which the remote flash units can be placed may vary with

shooting conditions.

Wireless remote

60 ° or less

sensors on flash units

5 m/15 ft. or less

10 m/33 ft.

or less

30 ° or less

should face camera.

Camera

(built-in flash)

30 ° or less

5 m/15 ft. or less

60 ° or less

7 Set the remote flash units to the selected channel.

Turn all the remote flash units on and set them to the channel selected in

Step 4. See the Speedlight instruction manuals for details.

189

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

8 Raise the built-in flash.

Press the M button to raise the built-in flash. Note that even if – – is selected for

Built-in flash>Mode, the built-in flash must be raised so that monitor

preflashes will be emitted.

9 Frame the photograph, focus, and shoot.

After confirming that the camera flash-ready light and the flash-ready lights for

all other flash units are lit, frame the photograph, focus, and shoot. FV lock (pg.

198) can be used if desired.

D ^{Commander Mode}

Position the sensor windows on the remote flash units to pick up the monitor preflashes from

the built-in flash (particular care is required when not using a tripod). Be sure that direct light

or strong reflections from the remote flash units do not enter the camera lens (in TTL mode) or

the photocells on the remote flash units (AA mode), as this may interfere with exposure. To

prevent timing flashes emitted by the built-in flash from appearing in photographs taken at

short range, choose low ISO sensitivities or small apertures (large f-numbers) or use an

optional SG-3IR infrared panel for the built-in flash. An SG-3IR is required for best results with

rear-curtain sync, which produces brighter timing flashes. After positioning the remote flash

units, take a test shot and view the results in the camera monitor.

Although there is no limit on the number of remote flash units that may be used, the practical

maximum is three. With more than this number, the light emitted by the remote flash units will

interfere with performance.

A ^{The Flash Mode Display}

M does not appear in the control panel flash mode display when – – is selected for Built-in

flash > Mode.

A ^{Flash Compensation}

The flash compensation value selected with the Y (M) button and sub-command dial is added

to the flash compensation values selected for the built-in flash, group A, and group B in the

Commander mode menu. A Y icon is displayed in the control panel and viewfinder when a

flash compensation value other than 0 is selected for Built-in flash > TTL. The Y icon

flashes when M is selected for Built-in flash.

190

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

e3: Modeling Flash

If On is selected when the camera is being used with the built-in flash or an optional

SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, or SB-R200 flash unit, a modeling flash will be emitted when

the camera depth-of-field preview button is pressed (pg. 82). The default setting is

Off. This option is available in P, S, A, and M modes only.

e4: Auto Bracketing Set

Choose the setting or settings bracketed when auto bracketing is in effect (P, S, A, and

M modes only). Choose AE & flash (j; the default setting) to perform both exposure

and flash-level bracketing (pg. 92), AE only (k) to bracket only exposure, Flash only

(l) to perform only flash-level bracketing, WB bracketing (m) to perform white-

balance bracketing (see below), or ADL bracketing to take one picture with Active

D-Lighting on and another with Active D-Lighting off (pg. 193).

❚❚White Balance Bracketing

1 Select white balance bracketing.

Choose WB bracketing for Custom Setting e4 (Auto

bracketing set). Note that white balance bracketing is not

available at image quality settings of NEF (RAW) or

NEF (RAW) + JPEG.

2 Choose the number of shots.

Pressing the D button, rotate the main command dial to choose the number of

shots in the bracketing sequence. The number of shots is shown in the control

panel.

Number of shots

Bracketing

progress

indicator

Control panel

D button

Main command dial

Viewfinder

At settings other than zero, a W icon and bracketing progress indicator

appear in the control panel.

191

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3 Select a white balance increment.

Pressing the D button, rotate the sub-command dial to choose the white

balance adjustment. Each increment is roughly equivalent to 5 mired.

White balance

increment

Control panel

D button

Sub-command dial

Choose from increments of 1 (5 mired), 2 (10 mired), or 3 (15 mired; for a

definition of mired, see page 98). Higher B values correspond to increased

amounts of blue, higher A values to increased amounts of amber (pg. 97). The

bracketing programs with an increment of 1 are listed below.

Control panel display

No. of shots

White balance increment

Bracketing order (EVs)

1 B

1 A

0 / 1 B

0 / 1 A

0 / 1 A / 1 B

1 A, 1 B

4 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.

Each shot will be processed to create the number of copies

specified in the bracketing program, and each copy will

have a different white balance. Modifications to white balance are added to the

white balance adjustment made with white balance fine-tuning.

If the number of shots in the bracketing program is

greater than the number of exposures remaining, the

exposure count displays in the control panel and

viewfinder will flash and the shutter release will be

disabled. Shooting can begin when a new memory

card is inserted.

192

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

❚❚Canceling Bracketing

To cancel bracketing, press the D button and rotate the main command dial until the

number of shots in the bracketing sequence is zero (r) and W is no longer

displayed in the control panel. The program last in effect will be restored the next

time bracketing is activated. Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a two-

button reset (pg. 75), although in this case the bracketing program will not be

restored the next time bracketing is activated.

A ^{White Balance Bracketing}

White balance bracketing affects only color temperature (the amber-blue axis in the white

balance fine-tuning display, pg. 97). No adjustments are made on the green-magenta axis.

If the camera is turned off while the memory card access lamp is lit, the camera will power off

only after all photographs in the sequence have been recorded.

❚❚ADL Bracketing

1 Select ADL bracketing.

Choose ADL bracketing for Custom Setting e4 (Auto

bracketing set).

2 Enable bracketing.

Pressing the D button, rotate the main command dial until the bracketing

progress indicator is displayed in the control panel.

Bracketing

progress

indicator

Control panel

D button

Main command dial

Viewfinder

193

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.

The camera will vary Active D-Lighting with each shot.

The first shot will be taken with Active D-Lighting off, the

following shot at the value currently selected for Active

D-Lighting in the shooting menu (pg. 165).

While bracketing is in effect, a bracketing progress

indicator will be displayed in the control panel. The y

segment will disappear from the indicator when the

unmodified shot is taken, the z indicator when the shot

with Active D-Lighting is taken.

❚❚Canceling Bracketing

To cancel bracketing, press the D button and rotate the main command dial until the

bracketing progress indicator is no longer displayed in the control panel.

D ^{Active D-Lighting}

Matrix metering (Z, pg. 87) is recommended. Noise, lines, and distortion may appear in

photographs taken with Active D-Lighting at high ISO sensitivities. The Brightness and

Contrast Picture Control settings (pg. 111) can not be adjusted while active D-Lighting is in

effect. In exposure mode M, an Active D-Lighting setting of Auto is equivalent to Normal.

194

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

e5: Auto FP

Selecting On for this option (available in only P, S, A, and M modes) enables Auto FP

High-Speed Sync with optional flash units that support the Nikon Creative Lighting

System (CLS). Auto FP allows the flash to be used at shutter speeds ¹/200 s–¹/4000 s.

Choose to enable fill flash when taking portraits under bright light or when taking

photographs at large apertures. Auto FP High-Speed Sync is not available when

using the built-in flash. The default setting is Off.

e6: Bracketing Order

At the default setting of MTR>under>over (H), exposure and flash bracketing are

performed in the order described on pages 92 and 264, white balance bracketing in

the order no modification, A, B (pg. 191). If Under>MTR>over (I) is selected,

exposure and flash bracketing will proceed in order from the lowest to the highest

value, white balance bracketing in the order A, no modification, B. This option is

available in P, S, A, and M modes only.

195

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

f: Controls

f1: D Switch

Choose the function performed by rotating the power switch to the D position. This

option is available in all shooting modes.

Option

Description

LCD backlight (D) (default) Control panel backlight illuminates for 6 s.

Control panel backlight illuminates and shooting

information is displayed in monitor.

g Both

f2: OK Button (Shooting Mode)

This option (available in all shooting modes) determines what operations can be

performed by pressing the J button in shooting mode.

Option

Description

Select center focus point Pressing the J button in shooting mode selects the center focus

(default)

point.

Highlight active focus

point

Pressing the J button in shooting mode highlights the active

focus point.

Pressing the J button has no effect when the camera is in

shooting mode.

Not used

196

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

f3: Assign FUNC. Button

Choose the role played by the Fn button. This option is

available in all shooting modes.

Option

Description

Press the Fn button and rotate the main command dial to turn the grid

display in the viewfinder on or off (pg. 9).

Press the Fn button and rotate the main command dial to select the AF-

area mode (pg. 173).

Framing grid

AF-area mode

Center focus

point

Press the Fn button and rotate the main command dial to choose

between normal and wide center focus points (pg. 174).

Press the Fn button to lock flash value (built-in flash and SB-900, SB-800,

SB-600, SB-400, and SB-R200 flash units only, see below). Press again to

cancel FV lock.

FV lock

(default)

The built-in flash and optional flash units turn off while the Fn button is

pressed.

Flash off

Matrix

metering

Center-

Matrix metering is activated while the Fn button is pressed.

weighted

metering

Center-weighted metering is activated while the Fn button is pressed.

Spot metering Spot metering is activated while the Fn button is pressed.

Accesstopitem Press the Fn button to jump to the top item in “MY MENU.” Select this

in MY MENU

option for quick access to a frequently-used menu item.

If image quality is set to JPEG fine, JPEG normal, or JPEG basic, “RAW”

will be displayed in the control panel and an NEF (RAW) copy will be

recorded with the next picture taken after the Fn button is pressed. To

exit without recording an NEF (RAW) copy, press the Fn button again or

turn the camera off.

& +NEF (RAW)

197

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

❚❚FV Lock

This feature is used to lock flash output, preventing the flash level from changing

between shots or while recomposing photographs. Flash output is adjusted

automatically for any changes in ISO sensitivity or aperture.

1 Assign FV lock to the Fn button.

Both the Fn and the AE-L/AF-L button can be used for FV

lock. To use the Fn button as described below, select FV

lock for Custom Setting f3 (Assign FUNC. button). To use

the AE-L/AF-L button, choose FV lock for Custom Setting f4

(Assign AE-L/AF-L button, pg. 200).

2 Raise the flash.

In i, k, n, and o modes, the flash will pop up

automatically as required when the shutter-release

button is pressed halfway. In P, S, A, and M modes, press

the M button to raise the flash.

M button

3 Focus.

Position the subject in the center of the frame

and press the shutter-release button halfway to

focus.

4 Lock flash level.

After confirming that the flash-ready indicator (M) is

displayed in the viewfinder, press the Fn button. The flash

will emit a monitor preflash to determine the appropriate

flash level. Flash output will be locked at this level and a

Fn button

FV lock icon (r) will appear in the viewfinder.

5 Recompose the photograph.

198

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 Take the photograph.

Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to shoot. If desired,

additional pictures can be taken without releasing FV lock.

7 Release FV lock.

Press the Fn button to release FV lock and confirm that the r icon is no longer

displayed in viewfinder.

D ^{Using FV Lock with the Built-in Flash}

When the built-in flash is used alone, FV lock is only available if TTL (the default setting) is

selected for Custom Setting e2 (Flash cntrl for built-in flash; pg. 185).

A ^{Using FV Lock with Optional Flash Units}

In addition to the built-in flash, FV lock is available with SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, SB-400 and

SB-R200 flash units (available separately). Set the optional flash to TTL mode (the SB-900 and

SB-800 can also be used in AA mode; see the flash manual for details). While FV lock is in effect,

flash output will automatically be adjusted for changes in flash zoom head position.

When Commander mode is selected for Custom Setting e2 (Flash cntrl for built-in flash,

pg. 185), FV lock can be used with remote SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, or SB-R200 flash units if (a)

any of the built-in flash, flash group A, or flash group B is in TTL mode, or (b) a flash group is

composed entirely of SB-900 and SB-800 flash units in TTL or AA mode.

199

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

f4: Assign AE-L/AF-L Button

Choose the role played by the AE-L/AF-L button. This option is

available in all shooting modes.

Option

Description

AE/AF lock

(default)

Focus and exposure lock while the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.

AE lock only Exposure locks while the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.

AF lock only Focus locks while the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.

Exposure locks when the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed, and remains locked

E AE lock (hold) until the button is pressed a second time or the exposure meters turn

off.

The AE-L/AF-L button initiates autofocus. The shutter-release button can

not be used to focus.

A AF-ON

Press the AE-L/AF-L button to lock flash value (built-in flash and SB-900,

SB-800, SB-600, SB-400, and SB-R200 flash units only, pg. 198). Press

again to cancel FV lock.

FV lock

200

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

f5: Customize Command Dials

This option (available in all shooting modes) controls the operation of the main and

sub-command dials.

Option

Description

Controls the direction of the command dials. Choose No (the default option) for

normal command dial operation, or Yes to reverse the rotation of the command

dials. This setting also applies to the command dials for the MB-D80.

At the default setting of Off, the main command dial controls shutter speed and

Reverse

rotation

Change the sub-command dial controls aperture. If On is selected, the main command

main/sub dial will control aperture and the sub-command dial shutter speed. This setting

also applies to the command dials for the MB-D80.

At the default setting of On, the main command dial can be used to choose the

picture displayed during full-frame playback, move the cursor left or right during

thumbnail playback, and move the menu highlight bar up or down. The sub-

command dial is used to display additional photo information in full-frame

Menus playback and to move the cursor up or down during thumbnail playback. While

and

menus are displayed, rotating the sub-command dial right displays the sub-menu

playback for the selected option, while rotating it left displays the previous menu. To make

a selection, press 2or J. On (image review excluded) is the same as On except

that the command dials can not be used during image review. If Off is selected,

the multi selector is used to choose the picture displayed during full-frame

playback, highlight thumbnails, and navigate menus.

f6: No Memory Card?

If Release locked (the default setting) is selected, the shutter-release button is only

enabled when a memory card is inserted in the camera. Selecting Enable release

allows the shutter to be released when no memory card is inserted, although no

pictures will be recorded (they will however be displayed in the monitor in demo

mode). Note that when photographs are being captured to a computer using

Camera Control Pro 2 (available separately), photographs are not recorded to the

camera memory card and the shutter will be enabled regardless of the setting

chosen for this option. This option is available in all shooting modes.

f7: Reverse Indicators

At the default setting of

and shooting information display are displayed with positive values on the left and

negative values on the right. Select (W) to display negative values on

(V), the exposure indicators in the viewfinder

the left and positive values on the right. This option is available in all shooting

modes.

201

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup

The setup menu contains the options listed below. To display the setup menu, press

G and press 4to highlight the tab for current menu, then press 1or 3to

highlight the setup menu tab; for more information, see page 19.

Option

Format memory card

LCD brightness

Clean image sensor

Lock mirror up for cleaning ¹

Video mode

See page

202

244

246

203

204

Option

Image comment

Auto image rotation

Image dust off ref photo

Battery info

See page

205

206

208

GPS

HDMI

World time

Eye-Fi upload ²

Firmware version

Language

1 Not available when battery is low.

204

2 Only available when compatible Eye-Fi

memory card is inserted (pg 208).

Format Memory Card

Format the card. Note that formatting permanently deletes all pictures and other data

on the card. Before formatting, be sure to make backup copies as required.

D ^{During Formatting}

Do not turn the camera off or remove memory cards during formatting.

A ^{Two-Button Format}

Memory cards can also be formatted by pressing the Q (O and Z) buttons for about two

seconds (pg. 75).

LCD Brightness

Press 1or 3to choose from seven settings for monitor

brightness. Choose higher values for increased brightness,

lower values for reduced brightness.

202

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Clean Image Sensor

Select this option to remove dust from the image sensor or to choose options for

automatic image sensor cleaning (pg. 244).

Lock Mirror up for Cleaning

Lock the mirror in the up position to allow inspection or manual cleaning of the low-

pass filter that protects the camera image sensor (pg. 246).

Video Mode

When connecting the camera to a television or VCR via the video connector, be sure

the camera video mode matches the device video standard (NTSC or PAL).

HDMI

The camera is equipped with an HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)

connector, allowing pictures to be played back on high-definition televisions or

monitors using a type C cable (available separately from commercial suppliers).

Before connecting the camera to high-definition device, choose the HDMI format

from the options below.

Option

Description

v Auto (default)

The camera automatically selects the appropriate format.

J 480p (progressive) 640 × 480 (progressive) format

K 576p (progressive) 720 × 576 (progressive) format

L 720p (progressive) 1,280 × 720 (progressive) format

M 1080i (interlaced) 1,920 × 1,080 (interlaced) format

The camera monitor turns off automatically when an HDMI device is connected.

203

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

World Time

Change time zones, set the camera clock, choose the date display order, and turn

daylight saving time on or off.

Option

Description

Choose a time zone. The camera clock is automatically set to the time in the

new time zone.

Time zone

Date and time Set the camera clock (pg. 27).

Date format Choose the order in which the day, month, and year are displayed.

Daylight

Turn daylight saving time on or off. The camera clock will automatically be

saving time advanced or set back one hour. The default setting is Off.

A ^{The Clock Battery}

The camera clock is powered by an independent, rechargeable power source, which is charged

as necessary when the main battery is installed or the camera is powered by an optional EH-5a

or EH-5 AC adapter (pg. 239). Two days of charging will power the clock for about three

months. If the B icon flashes in the control panel, the clock battery is exhausted and the

clock has been reset. Set the clock to the correct time and date.

Language

Choose a language for camera menus and messages. The following options are

available.

Option

Description

Option

Description

Portuguese

Russian

Danish

German

English

Spanish

Finnish

French

Italian

Swedish

Traditional Chinese

Simplified Chinese

Japanese

Korean

Dutch

Norwegian

Polish

204

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Image Comment

Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken. Comments can be viewed in

ViewNX (supplied) or Capture NX 2 (available separately; pg. 240). The comment is

also visible on the third page of the photo information display (pg. 132).

•

Done: Save changes and return to the setup menu.

Input comment: Input a comment as described on page 169. Comments can be up to

36 characters long.

•

Attach comment: Select this option to attach the comment to all

subsequent photographs. Attach comment can be turned

on and off by highlighting it and pressing 2.

Auto Image Rotation

Photographs taken while On (the default option) is selected contain information on

camera orientation, allowing them to be rotated automatically during playback (pg.

128) or when viewed in ViewNX or Capture NX 2 (available separately; pg. 240). The

following orientations are recorded:

Landscape (wide) orientation Camera rotated 90° clockwise

Camera rotated 90°

counterclockwise

Camera orientation is not recorded when Off is selected. Choose this option when

taking photographs with the lens pointing up or down.

D ^{Auto Image Rotation}

In ! and 9 release modes (pg. 65), the orientation recorded for the first shot applies to all

photographs in the same burst, even if camera orientation is changed during shooting.

A ^{Rotate Tall}

To automatically rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation) photographs for display during playback,

select On for the Rotate tall option in the playback menu (pg. 160). Note that because the

camera itself is already in the appropriate orientation during shooting, images are not rotated

automatically during image review (pg. 128).

205

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Image Dust off Ref Photo

Acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off option in Capture NX 2 (available

separately; for more information, see the Capture NX 2 manual).

Image dust off ref photo is available only when a CPU lens is mounted on the

camera. A lens with a focal length of at least 50 mm is recommended. When using a

zoom lens, zoom all the way in.

1 Choose a start option.

Highlight one of the following options and

press J. To exit without acquiring image dust

off data, press G.

•

Start: The message shown at right will be

displayed and “rEF” will appear in the

viewfinder and control panel displays.

•

Clean sensor and then start: Select this option to

clean the image sensor before starting. The

message shown at right will be displayed and

“rEF” will appear in the viewfinder and control

panel displays when cleaning is complete.

D^{Image Sensor Cleaning}

Dust off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed can not be

used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is performed. Select Clean

sensor and then start only if the dust off reference data will not be used with existing

photographs.

2 Frame a featureless white object in the viewfinder.

With the lens about ten centimeters (four inches) from a well-lit, featureless

white object, frame the object so that it fills the viewfinder and then press the

shutter-release button halfway.

In autofocus mode, focus will automatically be set to infinity; in manual focus

mode, set focus to infinity manually.

206

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3 Acquire dust off reference data.

Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to acquire Image Dust

Off reference data. The monitor turns off when the shutter-release button is

pressed. Note that noise reduction will be performed if the subject is poorly lit,

increasing recording times.

If the reference object is too bright or too dark, the camera

may be unable to acquire Image Dust Off reference data

and the message shown at right will be displayed. Choose

another reference object and repeat the process from

step 1.

D ^{Image Dust Off Reference Data}

The same reference data can be used for photographs taken with

different lenses or at different apertures. Reference images can not be

viewed using computer imaging software. A grid pattern is displayed

when reference images are viewed on the camera; histograms and

highlights are not displayed.

207

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Battery Info

View information on the battery currently inserted in the

camera (if the camera is powered by an optional MB-D80

battery pack containing two EN-EL3e batteries, information for

each battery will be listed separately; only the battery level is

displayed when AA batteries are used).

Item

Description

Bat. meter The current battery level expressed as a percentage.

The number of times the shutter has been released with the current battery since

the battery was last charged. Note that the camera may sometimes release the

shutter without recording a photograph, for example when measuring preset

Pic. meter

white balance.

A five-level display showing battery age. 0 (k) indicates that battery

performance is unimpaired, 4 (l) that the battery has reached the end of its

Battery charging life and should be replaced. Note that batteries charged at

age

temperatures under about 5 °C (41 °F) may show a temporary drop in charging

life; the charging life display will however return to normal once the battery has

been recharged at a temperature of about 20 °C (68 °F) or higher.

GPS

Adjust settings for connection to a GPS unit (pg. 124).

Eye-Fi Upload

This option is displayed only when one of the following 2GB Eye-Fi memory cards

(available separately from third-party suppliers) is inserted in the camera: Eye-Fi Card,

Eye-Fi Home, Eye-Fi Share, and Eye-Fi Explore (at the time of writing, Eye-Fi memory

cards were approved for use in the United States of America only; be sure that Eye-Fi

card firmware has been updated to the latest version). Choose Enable to upload

JPEG images taken with the camera to a preselected destination.

Note that pictures will not be uploaded if signal strength is insufficient. Choose

Disable where wireless devices are prohibited.

Firmware Version

View the current camera firmware version.

208

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

N The Retouch Menu:

Creating Retouched Copies

The options in the retouch menu are used to create trimmed or retouched copies of

the photographs on the memory card. The retouch menu is only available when a

memory card containing photographs is inserted in the camera. To display the

retouch menu, press G and press 4to highlight the tab for current menu, then

press 1or 3to highlight the retouch menu tab; for more information, see page 19.

Option

See page

212

213

214

Option

Image overlay

See page

218

220

221

D-Lighting ^*

Red-eye correction ^*

Trim

% NEF (RAW) processing

Quick retouch ^*

Straighten

Monochrome ^*

Filter effects ^*

215

216

(

)

Distortion control

Fisheye

222

n Color balance ^*

Small picture

216

p Side-by-side comparison

223

* Not available with photographs taken with Monochrome selected for Set Picture Control

or JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) images created with Monochrome selected for Set Picture

Control (cross screen filter effects can be applied to monochrome images).

209

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Creating Retouched Copies

Except in the case of Image overlay (pg. 218) and Side-by-side comparison

(pg. 223), the photographs to be retouched can be selected in full-frame playback as

well as from the retouch menu.

❚❚Creating Retouched Copies in Full-Frame Playback

1 Choose a picture.

Display the desired picture in full-frame

playback (pg. 128).

2 Display the retouch menu.

Press J to display the retouch menu.

3 Select retouch options.

Highlight the desired item in the retouch menu

and press 2to display retouch options (for

more information, see the section for the

selected item on the following pages). To return

to full-frame playback without creating a retouched copy, press K.

4 Create a retouched copy.

Press J to create a retouched copy. Retouched

copies are indicated by a N icon.

A ^Retouch

The D90 may not be able to display or create retouched copies of images created with other

devices.

The monitor will turn off automatically if no operations are performed for the length of time

selected for Custom Setting c4 (Monitor off delay) > Menus. The default is 20 s.

210

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

❚❚Creating Retouched Copies from the Retouch Menu

1 Select an item in the retouch menu.

Press 1or 3to highlight an item, 2to select.

Depending on the option selected, a menu may

be displayed; highlight an option and press 2.

2 Select a picture.

The pictures on the memory card will be

displayed. Use the multi selector to highlight a

picture (to view the highlighted picture full

screen, press and hold the X button).

3 Display retouch options.

Press J to display retouch options (see the

section for the selected option for details). To

exit without creating a retouched copy, press

4 Create a retouched copy.

Press J to create a retouched copy. Retouched

copies are indicated by a N icon.

A ^{Retouching Copies}

Copies created with Trim or Small picture can not be further modified. Quick retouch is not

available with copies created with D-lighting; similarly, D-lighting is not available with copies

created with Quick retouch. D-lighting, red-eye correction, filter effects (cross screen

excepted), quick retouch, and color balance can not be applied to monochrome copies. With

the exception of Cross screen, filter effects can not be applied to copies created with filters

other than Cross screen. Image overlay can be applied multiple times. Otherwise the

options in the retouch menu can each be applied once to existing copies, although multiple

edits may result in loss of detail.

A ^{Image Quality}

Except in the case of copies created with Trim (pg. 213), Small picture (pg. 216), and Image

overlay (pg. 218), copies created from JPEG images are the same size and quality as the

original, while copies created from NEF (RAW) photos are saved as large fine-quality JPEG

images.

211

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

D-Lighting

D-lighting brightens shadows, making it ideal for dark or backlit photographs.

Before

After

Press 1or 3to choose the amount of correction performed.

The effect can be previewed in the edit display. Press J to copy

the photograph.

Red-Eye Correction

This option is used to correct “red-eye” caused by the flash, and

is available only with photographs taken using the flash. The

photograph selected for red-eye correction is previewed as

shown at right. Confirm the effects of red-eye correction and

create a copy as described in the following table. Note that

red-eye correction may not always produce the expected results

and may in very rare circumstances be applied to portions of the image that are not

affected by red-eye; check the preview thoroughly before proceeding.

Use

Description

Press X button to zoom in, W button to

zoom out. While photo is zoomed in, use

multi selector to view areas of image not

visible in monitor. Keep multi selector

pressed to scroll rapidly to other areas of

frame. Navigation window is displayed

when zoom buttons or multi selector is

pressed; area currently visible in monitor is

indicated by yellow border. Press J to

cancel zoom.

Zoom in

Zoom out

View other

areas of image

Cancel zoom

Create copy

If the camera detects red-eye in the selected photograph, a copy

will be created that has been processed to reduce its effects. No

copy will be created if the camera is unable to detect red-eye.

212

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Trim

Create a cropped copy of the selected photograph. The

selected photograph is displayed with the selected crop shown

in yellow; create a cropped copy as described in the following

table.

Use

Description

Increase size of crop

Reduce size of crop

Press the X button to increase the size of the crop.

Press the W button to reduce the size of the crop.

Change crop aspect

ratio

Rotate the main command dial to switch between aspect

ratios of 3 : 2, 4 : 3, and 5 : 4.

Use multi selector to move the crop to another area of the

image.

Move crop

Preview crop

Create copy

Press center of multi selector to preview cropped image.

Save the current crop as a separate file.

D ^{Trim: Image Quality and Size}

Copies created from NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW) + JPEG photos have an image quality of JPEG fine

(pg. 62); copies created from JPEG photos have the same image quality as the original. The size

of the copy varies with crop size and aspect ratio.

Aspect ratio

3 : 2

Possible sizes

3,424 × 2,280, 2,560 × 1,704, 1,920 × 1,280, 1,280 × 856, 960 × 640, 640 × 424

3,424 × 2,568, 2,560 × 1,920, 1,920 × 1,440, 1,280 × 960, 960 × 720, 640 × 480

3,216 × 2,568, 2,400 × 1,920, 1,808 × 1,440, 1,200 × 960, 896 × 720, 608 × 480

4 : 3

5 : 4

213

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Monochrome

Copy photographs in Black-and-white, Sepia, or Cyanotype

(blue and white monochrome).

Increase

saturation

Selecting Sepia or Cyanotype displays a preview of

the selected image; press 1to increase color

saturation, 3to decrease. Press J to create a

monochrome copy.

Decrease

saturation

214

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Filter Effects

Choose from the following color filter effects. After adjusting filter effects as

described below, press J to copy the photograph.

Option

Description

Creates the effect of a skylight filter, making the picture less

Skylight blue. The effect can be previewed in the monitor as shown

at right.

Creates a copy with warm tone filter effects, giving the copy

a “warm” red cast. The effect can be previewed in the

monitor.

Warm

filter

Red

intensifier

Green

intensifier

Intensify reds (Red intensifier), greens (Green intensifier),

or blues (Blue intensifier). Use the multi selector to choose

from three intensity levels: 1 (high), 2 (medium), or 3 (low).

Blue

intensifier

Add starburst effects to light sources.

•

Number of points: Choose from four, six, or eight.

Filter amount: Choose the brightness of the light sources

affected.

Cross

screen

•

Filter angle: Choose the angle of the points.

Length of points: Choose the length of points.

Confirm: Preview the effects of the filter as shown at right.

Press X to preview the copy full frame.

Save: Create a retouched copy.

•

215

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Color Balance

Use the multi selector to create a copy with modified color

balance as shown below. The effect is displayed in the monitor

together with red, green, and blue histograms (pg. 130) giving

the distribution of tones in the copy.

Increase amount of green

Create retouched copy

Increase amount of blue

Increase amount of amber

Increase amount of magenta

A ^Zoom

To zoom in on the image displayed in the monitor, press the X button.

The histogram will be updated to show data only for the portion of the

image displayed in the monitor. While the image is zoomed in, press the

L button to toggle playback zoom and zoom and scroll the image as

described on page 138.

Small Picture

Create a small copy of the selected picture. The following sizes are available:

Option

Description

640×480 Suited to television playback.

320×240 Suited to display on Web pages.

160×120 Suitable for e-mail.

The small picture option can be used during full-frame playback as described on

page 210. The procedure for selecting pictures after choosing Small picture from

the retouch menu, however, differs from that described at the beginning of this

section: instead of selecting a single photograph and then choosing a picture size,

the user selects a picture size first and then selects one or more photographs to copy

at the selected size as described below.

Selecting Small picture from the retouch menu displays the menu shown in Step 1.

Follow the steps below to create small copies of multiple pictures.

1 Select Choose size.

Highlight Choose size and press 2.

216

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2 Choose the desired size.

Highlight desired size and press J to select and

return to the previous menu.

3 Choose Select image.

Highlight Select image and press 2.

4 Select pictures.

W button

Highlight pictures using the multi

selector and press the W button to

select or deselect (pg. 160). Selected

pictures are marked by an icon.

5 Press J to complete the operation.

Press J. A confirmation dialog will be

displayed; highlight Yes and press J to copy

pictures at the selected size and return to

playback. To exit without creating copies,

highlight No and press J, or press G to exit to

the retouch menu.

A ^{Viewing Small Pictures}

Small pictures are indicated by a gray border during full-frame playback. Playback zoom is not

available when small pictures are displayed.

217

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Image Overlay

Image overlay combines two existing NEF (RAW) photographs to create a single

picture that is saved separately from the originals; the results, which make use of RAW

data from the camera image sensor, are noticeably better than overlays created in an

imaging application. The new picture is saved at current image quality and size

settings; before creating an overlay, set image quality and size (pp. 62, 63; all options

are available). To create an NEF (RAW) copy, choose an image quality of NEF (RAW).

1 Select Image overlay.

Highlight Image overlay in the retouch menu

and press 2. The dialog shown at right will be

displayed, with Image 1 highlighted.

2 Display NEF (RAW) images.

Press J to display a picture selection dialog

listing only NEF (RAW) images created with this

camera (note that hidden images are not

displayed and can not be selected).

3 Highlight a photograph.

Use the multi selector to highlight the first

photograph in the overlay. To view the

highlighted photograph full frame, press and

hold the X button.

4 Select the highlighted photograph.

Press J to select the highlighted photograph

and return to the preview display. The selected

image will appear as Image 1.

5 Set gain.

Optimize exposure for the overlay by pressing

1or 3to select the gain for image 1 from

values between 0.1 and 2.0. The default value is

1.0; selecting 0.5 cuts gain in half, while

selecting 2.0 doubles gain. The effects of gain are visible in the Preview

column.

218

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 Select the second photograph.

Press 4or 2to highlight Image 2. Repeat

Steps 2–5 to select the second photo and adjust

gain.

7 Highlight the Preview column.

Press 4or 2to highlight the Preview column.

8 Preview the overlay.

Press 1or 3to highlight Overlay and press J

(to save the overlay without displaying a

preview, highlight Save and press J). To return

to Step 7 and select new photos or adjust gain,

press W.

9 Save the overlay.

Press J while the preview is displayed to save

the overlay. After an overlay is created, the

resulting image will be displayed full-frame in

the monitor.

D ^{Image Overlay}

The overlay has the same photo info (including date of recording, metering, shutter speed,

aperture, exposure mode, exposure compensation, focal length, and image orientation) and

values for white balance and Picture Control as the photograph selected for Image 1.

219

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

NEF (RAW) Processing

Create JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) photographs.

1 Select NEF (RAW) processing.

Highlight NEF (RAW) processing in the retouch

menu and press 2to display a picture selection

dialog listing only NEF (RAW) images created

with this camera (note that hidden images are

not displayed and can not be selected).

2 Select a photograph.

Use the multi selector to highlight a photograph

(to view the highlighted photograph full frame,

press and hold the X button). Press J to select

the highlighted photograph and proceed to the

next step.

3 Adjust NEF (RAW) processing settings.

The following options are available:

Option

Description

Image quality

Image size

Choose from FINE, NORM, and BASIC (pg. 62)

Choose from L, M, and S (pg. 63).

Choose a white balance setting and adjust fine tuning (pg. 97).

White balance This option is not available with images creating using Image

overlay.

Choose a value for exposure compensation between –3 and +3 in

Exposure comp. increments of 1 (these increments differ from the steps normally

used for exposure compensation).

Set Picture Control Choose a Picture Control (pg. 109).

220

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 Copy the photograph.

Highlight EXE and press J to create a JPEG copy

of the selected photograph. To exit without

copying the photograph, press the G button.

Quick Retouch

Create copies with enhanced saturation and contrast. D-lighting is applied as

required to brighten dark or backlit subjects.

Press 1or 3to choose the amount of enhancement. The effect

can be previewed in the edit display. Press J to copy the

photograph.

Straighten

Create a straightened copy of the selected image. Press 2to

rotate the image clockwise by up to five degrees in increments

of approximately 0.25 degrees, 4to rotate it counterclockwise

(note that edges of the image will be trimmed to create a square

copy). Press J to copy the photograph, or press K to exit to

playback without creating a copy.

221

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Distortion Control

Create copies with reduced peripheral distortion. Select Auto

to let the camera correct distortion automatically and then

make fine adjustments using the multi selector, or select

Manual to reduce distortion manually. Press 2to reduce barrel

distortion, 4to reduce pin-cushion distortion (note that greater

amounts of distortion control result in more of the edges being

cropped out). Press J to copy the photograph, or press K to

exit to playback without creating a copy.

D ^Auto

Auto is for use only with pictures taken with type G and D lenses (PC, fisheye, and certain other

lenses excluded; for more information, see the websites listed on page xviii). Results are not

guaranteed with other lenses.

Fisheye

Create copies that appear to have been taken with a fisheye

lens. Press 2to increase the effect (this also increases the

amount of that will be cropped out at the edges of the image),

4to reduce it. Press J to copy the photograph, or press K to

exit to playback without creating a copy.

222

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Side-by-Side Comparison

Compare retouched copies to the original photographs.

❚❚Making a Side-by-Side Comparison

1 Select a picture.

Use the multi selector to select a picture and

press J. Only retouched copies (shown by a N

icon) or photographs that have been retouched

can be selected.

2 Select Side-by-side comparison.

Highlight Side-by-side comparison and press

Options used to

created copy

3 Compare the copy with the original.

The source image is displayed on the left, the

retouched copy on the right, with the options

used to create the copy listed at the top of the

display. Press 1, 3, 4, or 2as indicated by the

arrow adjacent to the highlighted image to

switch between the source image and the

retouched copy. To view the highlighted

picture full frame, press and hold the X button.

Source Retouched

image

copy

If the copy was created from two images using Image overlay, press 1or 3to

view the other source image. If multiple copies exist for the current source

image, press 1or 3to view the other copies. To exit to playback mode, press

the K button, or press J to return to playback with the highlighted image

displayed.

D ^{Side-by-Side Comparison}

The source image will not be displayed if the copy was created from a photograph that has

since been deleted or is currently protected (pg. 139) or hidden (pg. 162).

223

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

m Recent Settings/OMy Menu

The camera offers a choice of two custom menus: a recent settings menu consisting of

the twenty most recently used settings, added to the top of the menu in the order

they are used, and My Menu, a customized list of options from the playback, shooting,

Custom Settings, setup, and retouch menus. To display the custom menu, press G

and press 4to highlight the tab for current menu, then press 1or 3to highlight the

custom menu tab; for more information, see page 19.

❚❚Choose Tab: Choosing a Custom Menu

Both the recent settings menu and My Menu contain a Choose tab option for

choosing the menu displayed. To switch back and forth between the recent settings

menu and My Menu, follow the steps below.

1 Select Choose tab.

In the m RECENT SETTINGS menu or O MY

MENU, highlight Choose tab and press 2.

2 Select the desired menu.

Highlight Recent settings or My Menu and

press J. The selected menu will be displayed.

m Recent Settings: Viewing Recent Settings

The recent settings menu lists the twenty most

recently used settings.

224

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

O My Menu: Creating a Custom Menu

The My Menu option can be used to create and edit a customized list of up to 20

options from the playback, shooting, Custom Settings, setup, and retouch menus.

Options can be added, deleted, and reordered as described below.

❚❚Adding Options to My Menu

1 Select Add items.

In My Menu, highlight Add items and press 2.

2 Select a menu.

Highlight the name of the menu containing the

option you wish to add and press 2.

3 Select an item.

Highlight the desired menu item and press J.

Items currently in My Menu are indicated by a

checkmark; items indicated by a V icon can not

be selected.

4 Position the new item.

Press 1or 3to move the new item up or down

in My Menu. Press J to add the new item.

Repeat steps 1–4 to select additional items.

❚❚Deleting Options from My Menu

1 Select Remove items.

In My Menu, highlight Remove items and press 2.

2 Select items.

Highlight items and press 2to select or

deselect. Selected items are indicated by a

check mark.

225

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3 Select Done.

Highlight Done and press J.

4 Delete the selected items.

A confirmation dialog will be displayed. Press J

to delete the selected items.

A ^{Deleting Items in My Menu}

To delete the item currently highlighted in My Menu, press the O button. A confirmation

dialog will be displayed; press O again to remove the selected item from My Menu.

❚❚Reordering Options in My Menu

1 Select Rank items.

In My Menu, highlight Rank items and press 2.

2 Select an item.

Highlight the item you wish to move and press

3 Position the item.

Press 1or 3to move the item up or down in My

Menu and press J. Repeat Steps 2–3 to

reposition additional items.

226

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical Notes

This chapter covers the following topics:

Compatible Lenses........................................................................................................ 228

Compatible CPU Lenses............................................................................................................ 229

Non-CPU Lenses.......................................................................................................................... 230

Optional Flash Units (Speedlights) ............................................................................ 233

The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS)......................................................................... 233

Flash Contacts .............................................................................................................................. 238

Other Accessories.......................................................................................................... 239

Caring for the Camera .................................................................................................. 243

Storage............................................................................................................................................ 243

Cleaning ......................................................................................................................................... 243

The Low-Pass Filter ..................................................................................................................... 244

Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions .......................................................... 248

Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................ 250

Error Messages............................................................................................................... 255

Appendix......................................................................................................................... 258

Available Settings and Defaults............................................................................................. 258

Memory Card Capacity ............................................................................................................. 262

Exposure Program ...................................................................................................................... 263

Bracketing Programs.................................................................................................................. 264

Flash Control................................................................................................................................. 265

Shutter Speeds Available with the Built-in Flash............................................................. 265

Aperture, Sensitivity, and Flash Range................................................................................ 266

Specifications ................................................................................................................. 267

227

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Compatible Lenses

CPU lenses (particularly types G and D) are recommended for use with the D90. CPU

lenses can be identified by the presence of CPU contacts, type G and D lenses by a

letter on the lens barrel. Type G lenses are not equipped with a lens aperture ring.

Aperture ring

CPU contacts

CPU lens

Type G lens

Type D lens

A ^{Calculating Picture Angle}

The size of the area exposed by a 35mm camera is 36 × 24 mm. The size of the area exposed by

the D90, in contrast, is 23.6 × 15.8 mm, meaning that the picture angle of a 35mm camera is

approximately 1.5 times that of the D90. The approximate focal length of lenses for the D90 in

35mm format can be calculated by multiplying the focal length of the lens by about 1.5.

Picture size (35mm format)

(36 × 24 mm)

Picture diagonal

Lens

Picture size (D90)

(23.6 × 15.8 mm)

Picture angle (35mm format)

Picture angle (D90)

A ^{Lens f-number}

The f-number given in lens names is the maximum aperture of the lens.

228

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Compatible CPU Lenses¹

Camera setting

Focus

Mode

Metering

M (with electronic

rangefinder)

i, j, k, l,

m, n, o, P, S, A

Lens/accessory

3D Color

Type G or D AF Nikkor², AF-S, AF-I Nikkor

PC-E NIKKOR series⁴

✔

—

✔

—

✔

✔ ✔

✔ —

—

✔

PC Micro 85mm f/2.8D⁵

AF-S / AF-I teleconverter⁶

✔

Other AF Nikkor (except lenses for F3AF)

AI-P Nikkor

1 IX-Nikkor lenses can not be used.

✔

—

✔

2 Vibration Reduction (VR) supported with VR lenses.

3 Spot metering meters selected focus point.

4 Can not be used with shifting or tilting.

5 The camera’s exposure metering and flash control systems may not function as expected when the

lens is shifted and/or tilted or an aperture other than the maximum aperture is used.

6 AF-S or AF-I lens required (see below).

7 With maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or faster.

8 When AF 80–200mm f/2.8, AF 35–70mm f/2.8, AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5 (New), or AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5

lenses are zoomed all the way in at the minimum focus distance, the in-focus indicator may be

displayed when the image on the matte screen in the viewfinder is not in focus. Focus manually until

image in viewfinder is in focus.

9 With maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.

A ^{The AF-S/AF-I Teleconverter}

The AF-S/AF-I teleconverter can be used with the following AF-S and AF-I lenses:

• AF-S VR Micro 105mm f/2.8G ED ¹

• AF-S VR 200mm f/2G ED

• AF-S VR 300mm f/2.8G ED

• AF-S 300mm f/2.8D ED II

• AF-S 300mm f/2.8D ED

• AF-S NIKKOR 500mm f/4G ED VR ²

• AF-S 500mm f/4D ED II ²

• AF-S 500mm f/4D ED ²

• AF-I 500mm f/4D ED ²

• AF-S NIKKOR 600mm f/4G ED VR ²

• AF-S 600mm f/4D ED II ²

• AF-S 600mm f/4D ED ²

• AF-I 300mm f/2.8D ED

• AF-S 300mm f/4D ED ²

• AF-S NIKKOR 400mm f/2.8G ED VR

• AF-S 400mm f/2.8D ED II

• AF-S 400mm f/2.8D ED

• AF-I 600mm f/4D ED ²

• AF-S VR 70–200mm f/2.8G ED

• AF-S 80–200mm f/2.8D ED

• AF-S VR 200–400mm f/4G ED ²

• AF-I 400mm f/2.8D ED

1 Autofocus not supported.

2 Autofocus not supported when used with AF-S Teleconverter TC-17E II/TC-20E II.

229

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Non-CPU Lenses¹

Non-CPU lenses include manual focus lenses and other lenses without a built-in CPU.

The following is a list of compatible non-CPU lenses and accessories.

Camera setting

Focus

Mode

i, j, k, l,

m, n, o, P, S, A

Metering

a, Z,

M(with electronic

rangefinder)

Lens/accessory

AI-, AI-modified, Nikkor or Nikon Series E lenses

Medical-Nikkor 120mm f/4

—

✔

—

✔

—

3, 4

✔

Reflex-Nikkor

PC-Nikkor

AI-type Teleconverter

—

✔

PB-6 Bellows Focusing Attachment ⁷

Auto extension rings (PK-series 11A, 12, or 13;

PN-11)

✔

—

✔

—

✔

—

1 Some lenses can not be used (see below).

2 With maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.

3 Electronic analog exposure display can not be used.

4 Shutter speeds slower than ¹/60 s not available.

5 Can not be used with shifting or tilting.

6 With maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or faster.

7 Attach in vertical orientation (can be used in horizontal orientation once attached).

D ^{Compatible Non-CPU Lenses}

The lenses listed above may only be used when the camera is in mode M. Selecting another

mode disables the shutter release. Aperture must be adjusted manually via the lens aperture

ring and the camera autofocus system, metering, electronic analog exposure display, depth-

of-field preview, and i-TTL flash control can not be used.

D ^{Incompatible Accessories and Non-CPU Lenses}

The following accessories and non-CPU lenses can NOT be used with the D90:

• TC-16AS AF teleconverter

• Non-AI lenses

• Lenses that require the AU-1 focusing unit (400mm f/4.5, 600mm f/5.6, 800mm f/8, 1200mm

f/11)

• Fisheye (6mm f/5.6, 7.5mm f/5.6, 8mm f/8, OP 10mm f/5.6)

• 2.1cm f/4

• Extension Ring K2

• 180–600mm f/8 ED (serial numbers 174041–174180)

• 360–1200mm f/11 ED (serial numbers 174031–174127)

• 200–600mm f/9.5 (serial numbers 280001–300490)

• AF lenses for the F3AF (AF 80mm f/2.8, AF 200mm f/3.5 ED, AF Teleconverter TC-16)

• PC 28mm f/4 (serial number 180900 or earlier)

• PC 35mm f/2.8 (serial numbers 851001–906200)

• PC 35mm f/3.5 (old type)

• Reflex 1000mm f/6.3 (old type)

• Reflex 1000mm f/11 (serial numbers 142361–143000)

• Reflex 2000mm f/11 (serial numbers 200111–200310)

230

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

D ^{Red-Eye Reduction}

Lenses that block the subject’s view of the AF-assist illuminator may interfere with red-eye

reduction.

D ^{AF-Assist Illumination}

AF-assist illumination is not available with the following lenses:

• AF-S NIKKOR 14–24mm f/2.8G ED

• AF-S VR 70–200mm f/2.8G ED

• AF-S 80–200mm f/2.8D ED

• AF 80–200mm f/2.8D ED

• AF VR 80–400mm f/4.5–5.6D ED

• AF-S VR 200mm f/2G ED

• AF-S VR 200–400mm f/4G ED

At ranges under 1 m (3 ft. 3 in.), the following lenses may block the AF-assist illuminator and

interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor:

• AF-S DX 12–24mm f/4G ED

AF-S DX NIKKOR 16–85mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR

• AF-S 17–35mm f/2.8D ED

• AF 24–85mm f/2.8–4D

• AF-S VR 24–120mm f/3.5–5.6G ED

• AF 24–120mm f/3.5–5.6D

•

• AF-S DX 17–55mm f/2.8G ED

• AF 18–35mm f/3.5–4.5D ED

• AF-S DX 18–70mm f/3.5–4.5G ED

• AF-S 28–70mm f/2.8D ED

• AF 28–200mm f/3.5–5.6G ED

• AF Micro 70–180mm f/4.5–5.6D ED

• AF-S VR Micro 105mm f/2.8G ED

• AF Micro 200mm f/4D ED

•

AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR

• AF-S DX VR 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G

• AF 20–35mm f/2.8D

• AF-S NIKKOR 24–70mm f/2.8G ED

• AF-S 24–85mm f/3.5–4.5G ED

231

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

D ^{The Built-in Flash}

The built-in flash can be used with CPU lenses with focal lengths of 18–300 mm. Remove lens

hoods to prevent shadows. The flash has a minimum range of 60 cm (2 ft.) and can not be used

in the macro range of macro zoom lenses. The flash may be unable to light the entire subject

with the following lenses at ranges less than those given below:

Lens

AF-S DX 12–24mm f/4G ED

Zoom position

20 mm

24 mm

18 mm

20 mm

24 mm

28 mm, 35 mm

28 mm

Min. range

2.0 m/6 ft. 7 in.

1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.

2.0 m/6 ft. 7 in.

1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.

2.0 m/6 ft. 7 in.

1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.

1.5 m/4 ft. 11 in.

1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.

2.5 m/8 ft. 2in.

1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.

1.5 m/4 ft. 11 in.

1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.

1.5 m/4 ft. 11 in.

1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.

1.5 m/4 ft. 11 in.

1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.

2.0 m/6 ft. 7 in.

1.5 m/4 ft. 11 in.

1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.

3.0 m/9 ft. 10 in.

2.5 m/8 ft. 2in.

AF-S DX NIKKOR 16–85mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR

AF-S 17–35mm f/2.8D ED

AF-S DX 17–55mm f/2.8G ED

35 mm

24 mm

18 mm

20 mm

24 mm

18 mm

AF 18–35mm f/3.5– 4.5D ED

AF-S DX 18–70mm f/3.5–4.5G ED

AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR

AF-S DX 18–135mm f/3.5–5.6G ED

AF-S DX VR 18– 200mm f/3.5–5.6G ED

24 mm, 35 mm

20 mm

AF 20–35mm f/2.8D

24 mm

35 mm

24 mm

35 mm

50 mm

AF-S NIKKOR 24–70mm f/2.8G ED

AF-S VR 24–120mm f/3.5–5.6G ED

PC-E NIKKOR 24mm f/3.5 ED ^*

AF-S 28–70mm f/2.8D ED

200 mm

250 mm, 300 mm

AF-S VR 200–400mm f/4G ED

* Can not be used with shifting or tilting.

When used with the AF-S NIKKOR 14–24 mm f/2.8G ED, the flash will be unable to light the

entire subject at all ranges.

With the exceptions of the AI-S ED 200mm f/2 and AI ED 200mm f/2, the built-in flash can also

be used with AI- and AI-modified Nikkor and Nikon Series E non-CPU lenses with focal lengths

of 18–200 mm. At the 35 mm zoom position, AI-S 25–50mm f/4, AI 25–50mm f/4, and AI-S 35–

70mm lenses must be used at ranges of 1.0 m/3ft. 3 in. or more. AI 50–300mm f/4.5, AI-

modified 50–300mm f/4.5, AI-S 50–300mm f/4.5 ED, and AI-modified 85–250mm f/4 lenses

must be used at zoom positions of 135 mm or above, AI 50–300 f/4.5 ED lenses at 105 mm or

above.

232

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Optional Flash Units (Speedlights)

The D90 can be used with CLS-compatible flash units. Remove the

accessory shoe cover when attaching optional flash units. The built-

in flash will not fire when an optional flash unit is attached.

The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS)

Nikon’s advanced Creative Lighting System (CLS) offers improved communication

between the camera and compatible flash units for improved flash photography.

The Creative Lighting System supports the following features:

•

i-TTL flash control: Improved through-the-lens (TTL) flash control for use with CLS

(see page 265). Flash level is set using monitor pre-flashes to measure the light

reflected by the subject, ensuring optimal flash output.

•

Advanced Wireless Lighting: Allows i-TTL flash control with remote wireless flash units.

FV lock (pg. 198): Locks flash level at the metered value, allowing a series of

photographs to be taken at the same flash level.

•

Auto FP High-Speed Sync (pg. 195): Allows the flash to be used at the highest shutter

speed supported by the camera, making it possible to choose the maximum

aperture for reduced depth of field.

233

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

❚❚CLS-Compatible Flash Units

The D90 can be used with the following CLS-compatible flash units: the SB-900,

SB-800, SB-600, SB-400, SB-R200, and SU-800.

The SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, SB-400, and SB-R200

The principal features of these flash units are listed below.

Flash unit

Feature

SB-900 ¹

34/111

48/157

17–200

12, 14, 17

SB-800

38/125

53/175

24–105

14, 17

SB-600

30/98

42/138

24–85

SB-400

21/69

30/98

—

SB-R200 ²

10/32

ISO 100

ISO 200

Auto power zoom (mm)

Wide panel (mm)

Guide No. ³

14/49

—

60 ° down (toward

lens light axis),

45 ° up (away from

light axis)

7 ° down, 90 ° up,

180 ° left,

7 ° down, 90 ° up,

180 ° left/right

90 ° up, 180 ° left,

90 ° right

Head rotation

90 ° up

90 ° right

1 If a color filter is attached to the SB-900 when AUTO or N (flash) is selected for white balance, the camera

will automatically detect the filter and adjust white balance appropriately.

2 Controlled remotely with built-in flash in commander mode or using optional SB-900, SB-800 flash unit

or SU-800 wireless Speedlight commander.

3 m/ft., 20 °C (68 °F), SB-900, SB-800 and SB-600 at 35 mm zoom head position; SB-900 with standard

illumination.

4 27 mm zoom coverage.

5 24 mm zoom coverage.

SU-800 Wireless Speedlight Commander

When mounted on a CLS-compatible camera, the SU-800 can be used as a

commander for remote SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, or SB-R200 flash units. The SU-800

itself is not equipped with a flash.

D ^{Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories}

Use only Nikon flash units. Negative voltages or voltages over 250 V applied to the accessory

shoe could not only prevent normal operation, but damage the sync circuitry of the camera or

flash. Before using a Nikon flash unit not listed in this section, contact a Nikon-authorized

service representative for more information.

A ^{Guide Number}

To calculate the range of the flash at full power, divide the Guide Number by the aperture. For

example, at ISO 100 the SB-800 has a Guide Number of 38 m or 125 ft. (35 mm zoom head

position); its range at an aperture of f/5.6 is 38÷5.6 or about 6.8 meters (or in feet,

125÷5.6=approximately 23 ft. 7 in.). For each twofold increase in ISO sensitivity, multiply the

Guide Number by the square root of two (approximately 1.4).

234

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The following features are available with the SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, SB-400,

SB-R200, and SU-800:

Flash unit

Advanced Wireless Lighting

Commander Remote

SB-900

SB-800 SB-600 SB-400 SB-800 SU-800 ¹SB-800 SB-600 SB-R200

SB-900

Flash mode/feature

i-TTL i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR

AA Auto aperture

✔

—

✔

—

✔

—

✔

—

✔

—

✔

—

✔

—

✔

—

✔

Non-TTL auto

GN Distance-priority manual

Manual

✔

—

✔

—

✔

—

✔

—

✔

—

✔

—

✔

—

RPT Repeating flash

Auto FP High-Speed Sync ⁷

FV lock

✔

—

✔

AF-assist for multi-area AF⁸

Flash Color Information Communication

REAR Rear-curtain sync

—

✔

—

✔

Red-eye reduction

—

Auto zoom

1 Only available when SU-800 is used to control other flash units.

2 Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR is used with spot metering or when selected with flash unit.

3 Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR is used with spot metering.

4 Selected with flash unit.

5 Auto aperture (AA) is used regardless of mode selected with flash unit.

6 Can be selected with camera.

7 Select On for Custom Setting e5 (Auto FP, pg. 195).

8 CPU lens required.

235

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

❚❚Other Flash Units

The following flash units can be used in non-TTL auto and manual modes. If they are

set to TTL, the camera shutter-release button will lock and no photographs can be

taken.

SB-30, SB-27 ¹, SB-22S,

SB-22, SB-20, SB-16B, SB-15 SB-21B ², SB-29S ²

SB-23, SB-29 ²,

Speedlight

SB-80DX, SB-28DX, SB-28,

SB-26, SB-25, SB-24

Flash mode

SB-50DX

—

Non-TTL auto

Manual

Repeating flash

✔

—

✔

—

✔

—

✔

—

✔

REAR Rear-curtain sync

1 Flash mode is automatically set to TTL and shutter-release is disabled. Set flash unit to A (non-TTL auto

flash).

2 Autofocus is only available with AF-Micro lenses (60 mm, 105 mm, or 200 mm).

236

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

D ^{Notes on Optional Speedlights}

Refer to the Speedlight manual for detailed instructions. If the Speedlight supports the Nikon

Creative Lighting System, refer to the section on CLS-compatible digital SLR cameras. The D90

is not included in the “digital SLR” category in the SB-80DX, SB-28DX, and SB-50DX manuals.

If an optional flash unit is attached with the camera in modes other than j, the flash will fire

whenever a photograph is taken. The following flash modes are available:

• i, k, and n modes: Fill flash and red-eye reduction. Fill flash is automatically selected if the

flash mode is set to off or auto when an optional flash unit is attached. Auto with red-eye

reduction becomes red-eye reduction.

• o mode: Auto slow sync becomes slow sync, auto slow sync with red-eye reduction becomes

slow sync with red-eye reduction, and off becomes slow sync.

i-TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 200 and 3200. At values over 3200,

the desired results may not be achieved at some ranges or aperture settings. If the flash-ready

indicator blinks for about three seconds after a photograph is taken, the flash has fired at full

power and the photograph may be underexposed.

The SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, and SB-400 provide red-eye reduction, while the SB-900, SB-800,

SB-600, and SU-800 provide AF-assist illumination. With other Speedlights, the camera AF-assist

illuminator is used for AF-assist illumination and red-eye reduction. When used with AF lenses

with focal lengths of 17–135 mm, the SB-900 provides active AF-assist illumination for all focus

points; note, however, that autofocus is available only with the following focus points:

17–105 mm

106–135mm

When used with AF lenses with focal lengths of 24–105 mm, the SB-800, SB-600 and SU-800

provides active AF-assist illumination to assist autofocus for the following focus points:

24–34 mm

35–105mm

In programmed auto, the maximum aperture (minimum f-number) is limited according to

sensitivity (ISO equivalency), as shown below:

Maximum aperture at ISO sensitivity of

Mode

P, i, k, l, m, o

200

400

4.8

9.5

800

5.6

1600

6.7

3200

For each one-step increase in sensitivity (e.g., from 200 to 400), aperture is stopped down by

half an f-stop. If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given above, the maximum

value for aperture will be the maximum aperture of the lens.

When an SC-series 17, 28, or 29 sync cable is used for off-camera flash photography, correct

exposure may not be achieved in i-TTL mode. We recommend that you choose spot metering

to select standard i-TTL flash control. Take a test shot and view the results in the monitor.

In i-TTL, use the flash panel or bounce adapter provided with the flash unit. Do not use other

panels such as diffusion panels, as this may produce incorrect exposure.

237

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Flash Contacts

The D90 is equipped with an accessory shoe for attaching optional flash units directly

to the camera and a sync terminal that allows flash units to be connected via a sync

cable.

❚❚The Accessory Shoe

Use the accessory shoe to mount optional flash units directly

on the camera without a sync cable (pg. 234). The accessory

shoe is equipped with a safety lock for Speedlights with a

locking pin, such as the SB-900, SB-800, SB-600 and SB-400.

Accessory shoe

A ^{The AS-15 Accessory Shoe Adapter}

When the AS-15 accessory shoe adapter (available separately) is mounted on the camera

accessory shoe, flash accessories can be connected via a sync cable.

238

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Other Accessories

At the time of writing, the following accessories were available for the D90.

•

Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL3e (pp. 22, 23): Additional EN-EL3e batteries are

available from local retailers and Nikon service representatives. The EN-EL3e can

be recharged using an MH-18a or MH-18 quick charger.

Multi-Power Battery Pack MB-D80: The MB-D80 takes one

or two rechargeable Nikon EN-EL3e Li-ion battery or

six AA alkaline, NiMH, lithium, or nickel-manganese

batteries. It is equipped with a shutter-release

•

Power

sources

button, AE-L/AF-L button, multi selector, and main- and

sub-command dials for improved operation when

taking photographs in portrait (tall) orientation.

When attaching the MB-D80, remove the camera

battery-chamber cover as shown at right.

Quick Charger MH-18a (pg. 22): The MH-18a can be used

to recharge EN-EL3e battery.

AC Adapter EH-5a/EH-5: These AC adapters can be used to

power the camera for extended periods.

DK-20C Eyepiece Correction Lenses: Lenses are available with diopters of –5, –4, –3,

–2, 0, +0.5, +1, +2, and +3 m^–1. Use eyepiece correction lenses only if the desired

focus can not be achieved with the built in diopter adjustment control

(–2.0 to +1.0 m^–1). Test eyepiece correction lenses before purchase to ensure

that the desired focus can be achieved.

35°

•

Magnifying Eyepiece DK-21M: The DK-21M increases viewfinder magnification to

Viewfinder

eyepiece

accessories

approximately 1.10 × (50 mm f/1.4 lens at infinity; –1.0 m^–1).

Magnifier DG-2: The DG-2 magnifies the scene displayed in the viewfinder. Use for

close-up photography, copying, telephoto lenses, and other tasks that require

added precision. Eyepiece adapter required (available separately).

Eyepiece Adapter DK-22: The DK-22 is used when attaching the DG-2 magnifier.

Right-Angle Viewing Attachment DR-6: The DR-6 attaches at a right angle to the

viewfinder eyepiece, allowing the image in the viewfinder to be viewed from

above when the camera is in portrait orientation.

•

239

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• Nikon filters can be divided into three types: screw-in, slip-in, and rear-

interchange. Use Nikon filters; filters manufactured by other makers may

interfere with autofocus or electronic range finding.

• The D90 can not be used with linear polarizing filters. Use the C-PL circular

polarizing filter instead.

Filters

• The NC and L37C filters are recommended for protecting the lens.

• To prevent moiré, use of a filter is not recommended when the subject is framed

against a bright light, or when a bright light source is in the frame.

• Center-weighted metering is recommended with filters with exposure factors

(filter factors) over 1 × (Y44, Y48, Y52, O56, R60, X0, X1, C-PL, ND2S, ND4, ND4S,

ND8, ND8S, ND400, A2, A12, B2, B8, B12).

Optional

flash units

(pg. 233)

•

Nikon Speedlights SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, and SB-400

Nikon Wireless Remote Speedlight SB-R200

Wireless Speedlight Commander SU-800

Capture NX 2: A complete photo editing package.

Camera Control Pro 2: Control the camera remotely from a computer and save

photographs directly to the computer hard disk.

Software

Body cap

Note: Use the latest versions of Nikon software. Most Nikon software offers an auto

update feature when the computer is connected to the Internet.

Body Cap: The body cap keeps the mirror, viewfinder screen, and low-pass filter free

of dust when a lens is not in place.

240

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The D90 is equipped with an accessory terminal for

remote cords and GPS devices. The terminal is provided

with a cap, which protects the contacts when the

terminal is not in use. The following accessories can be

used (all lengths are approximate):

Accessory

terminal

accessories

Accessory

Remote This 1 m (3 ft. 3 in.) cord can be used to operate camera remotely, to

Cord eliminate blur caused by camera movement when shutter-release

Description

MC-DC2 button is pressed, or to take pictures at a shutter speed of “bulb”.

GPS Unit Connect to accessory terminal to record latitude, longitude,

GP-1

altitude, and UTC time with pictures (pg. 124).

ML-L3 wireless remote control: Use as a remote shutter release for self-portraits or to

prevent blur caused by camera shake. The ML-L3 uses a 3 V CR2025 battery.

Remote

controls

241

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

❚❚Approved Memory Cards

The following SD memory cards have been tested and approved for use in the D90.

All cards of the designated make and capacity can be used, regardless of speed.

SanDisk 512MB, 1GB, 2GB ^*, 4GB ^†, 8GB ^†

Toshiba 512MB, 1GB, 2GB ^*, 4GB ^†, 8GB ^†, 16GB ^†, 32GB ^†

Panasonic 512MB, 1GB, 2GB ^*, 4GB ^†, 8GB ^†, 16GB ^†, 32GB ^†

512MB, 1GB, 2GB ^*, 4GB ^†

Lexar Media Platinum II: 512MB, 1GB, 2GB ^*, 4GB ^†

Professional: 1GB, 2GB ^*, 4GB^†

If card will be used with card reader or other device, check that device supports 2GB cards.

† SDHC compliant. If card will be used with card reader or other device, check that device

supports SDHC.

Other cards have not been tested. For more details on the above cards, please

contact the manufacturer.

242

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Caring for the Camera

Storage

When the camera will not be used for an extended period, replace the monitor cover,

remove the battery, and store the battery in a cool, dry area with the terminal cover

in place. To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry, well-ventilated area.

Do not store your camera with naphtha or camphor moth balls or in locations that:

• are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60%

• are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic fields, such as

televisions or radios

• are exposed to temperatures above 50 °C (122 °F) or below –10 °C (14 °F)

Cleaning

Use a blower to remove dust and lint, then wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. After

Camera

body

using the camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off sand or salt with a cloth lightly

dampened in distilled water and dry thoroughly. Important: Dust or other foreign

matter inside the camera may cause damage not covered under warranty.

These glass elements are easily damaged. Remove dust and lint with a blower. If

using an aerosol blower, keep the can vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid. To

remove fingerprints and other stains, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft

cloth and clean with care.

Lens,

mirror, and

viewfinder

Remove dust and lint with a blower. When removing fingerprints and other stains,

wipe the surface lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather. Do not apply pressure,

as this could result in damage or malfunction.

Monitor

Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals.

243

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The Low-Pass Filter

The image sensor that acts as the camera’s picture element is fitted with a low-pass

filter to prevent moiré. If you suspect that dirt or dust on the filter is appearing in

photographs, you can clean the filter using the Clean image sensor option in the

setup menu. The filter can be cleaned at any time using the Clean now option, or

cleaning can be performed automatically when the camera is turned on or off.

❚❚“Clean Now”

Place the camera base down.

Image sensor cleaning is most effective when the camera

is placed base down as shown at right.

Display the Clean image sensor menu.

Highlight Clean image sensor in the setup

menu and press 2.

Select Clean now.

Highlight Clean now and press 2.

The message shown at right will be displayed

while cleaning is in progress.

The message shown at right will be displayed

when cleaning is complete.

244

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

❚❚“Clean at Startup/Shutdown”

Select Clean at startup/shutdown.

Display the Clean image sensor menu as

described in Step 1 on the previous page.

Highlight Clean at startup/shutdown and

press 2.

Select an option.

Highlight one of the following options and

press J.

Option

Description

The image sensor is automatically cleaned each time the

camera is turned on.

5 Clean at startup

Clean at

The image sensor is automatically cleaned during shutdown

each time the camera is turned off.

shutdown

Clean at startup

7 & shutdown

(default)

The image sensor is cleaned automatically at startup and at

shutdown.

Cleaning off

Automatic image sensor cleaning off.

D ^{Image Sensor Cleaning}

The following interrupt image sensor cleaning: raising the built-in flash, pressing the shutter-

release, a, depth-of-field preview, or B button, using the AE-L/AF-L button to focus, or using the

Fn button for FV lock.

Cleaning is performed by vibrating the image sensor. If dust can not be fully removed using

the options in the Clean image sensor menu, clean the image sensor manually (pg. 246) or

consult a Nikon-authorized service representative.

If image sensor cleaning is performed several times in succession, image sensor cleaning may

be temporarily disabled to protect the camera’s internal circuitry. Cleaning can be performed

again after a short wait.

245

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

❚❚Manual Cleaning

If foreign matter can not be removed from the low-pass filter using the Clean image

sensor option in the setup menu (pg. 244), the filter can be cleaned manually as

described below. Note, however, that the filter is extremely delicate and easily

damaged. Nikon recommends that the filter be cleaned only by Nikon-authorized

service personnel.

Charge the battery or connect an AC adapter.

A reliable power source is required when inspecting or cleaning the low-pass

filter. If the battery level is below J (60%), turn the camera off and insert a

fully-charged EN-EL3e battery or connect an optional EH-5a or EH-5 AC adapter.

Remove the lens.

Turn the camera off and remove the lens.

Select Lock mirror up for cleaning.

Turn the camera on. Highlight Lock mirror up

for cleaning in the setup menu and press 2

(note that this option is not available at battery

levels of J or below).

Press J.

The message shown at right will be displayed in

the monitor and a row of dashes will appear in

the control panel and viewfinder. To restore

normal operation without inspecting the low-

pass filter, turn the camera off.

Raise the mirror.

Press the shutter-release button all the way

down. The mirror will be raised and the shutter

curtain will open, revealing the low-pass filter.

The viewfinder display will turn off and the

control panel display will blink.

Examine the low-pass filter.

Holding the camera so that light falls on the

low-pass filter, examine the filter for dust or lint.

If no foreign objects are present, proceed to

Step 8.

246

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Clean the filter.

Remove any dust and lint from the filter with a

blower. Do not use a blower-brush, as the

bristles could damage the filter. Dirt that can

not be removed with a blower can only be

removed by Nikon-authorized service

personnel. Under no circumstances should you touch or wipe the filter.

Turn the camera off.

The mirror will return to the down position and the shutter curtain will close.

Replace the lens or body cap.

A ^{Use a Reliable Power Source}

The shutter curtain is delicate and easily damaged. If the camera powers off while the mirror is

raised, the curtain will close automatically. To prevent damage to the curtain, observe the

following precautions:

• Do not turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source while the mirror is

raised.

• If the battery runs low while the mirror is raised, a beep will sound and the self-timer lamp

will blink to warn that the shutter curtain will close and the mirror will be lowered after

about two minutes. End cleaning or inspection immediately.

D ^{Foreign Matter on the Low-Pass Filter}

Nikon takes every possible precaution to prevent foreign matter from coming into contact

with the low-pass filter during production and shipping. The D90, however, is designed to be

used with interchangeable lenses, and foreign matter may enter the camera when lenses are

removed or exchanged. Once inside the camera, this foreign matter may adhere to the low-

pass filter, where it may appear in photographs taken under certain conditions. To protect the

camera when no lens is in place, be sure to replace the body cap provided with the camera,

being careful to first remove all dust and other foreign matter that may be adhering to the

body cap. Avoid exchanging lenses in dusty environments.

Should foreign matter find its way onto the low-pass filter, clean the filter as described above,

or have the filter cleaned by authorized Nikon service personnel. Photographs affected by the

presence of foreign matter on the filter can be retouched using Capture NX 2 (available

separately; pg. 240) or the clean image options available in some third-party imaging

applications.

D ^{Servicing the Camera and Accessories}

The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing. Nikon recommends that the

camera be inspected by the original retailer or Nikon service representative once every one to

two years, and that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that fees apply to these

services). Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly recommended if the camera is

used professionally. Any accessories regularly used with the camera, such as lenses or optional

Speedlights, should be included when the camera is inspected or serviced.

247

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Caring for the Camera and Battery:

Cautions

Do not drop: The product may malfunction if

subjected to strong shocks or vibration.

Cleaning: When cleaning the camera body, use

a blower to gently remove dust and lint, then

wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. After using

the camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off

any sand or salt using a cloth lightly

dampened in pure water and then dry the

camera thoroughly. In rare instances, static

electricity may cause the LCD displays to

light up or go dark. This does not indicate a

malfunction, and the display will soon return

to normal.

Keep dry: This product is not waterproof, and

may malfunction if immersed in water or

exposed to high levels of humidity. Rusting

of the internal mechanism can cause

irreparable damage.

Avoid sudden changes in temperature: Sudden

changes in temperature, such as occur when

entering or leaving a heated building on a

cold day, can cause condensation inside the

device. To prevent condensation, place the

device in a carrying case or plastic bag before

exposing it to sudden changes in

The lens and mirror are easily damaged. Dust

and lint should be gently removed with a

blower. When using an aerosol blower, keep

the can vertical to prevent discharge of

liquid. To remove fingerprints and other

stains from the lens, apply a small amount of

lens cleaner to a soft cloth and wipe the lens

carefully.

temperature.

Keep away from strong magnetic fields: Do not use

or store this device in the vicinity of

equipment that generates strong

electromagnetic radiationormagnetic fields.

Strong static charges or the magnetic fields

produced by equipment such as radio

transmitters could interfere with the monitor,

damage data stored on the memory card, or

affect the product’s internal circuitry.

See “The Low-Pass Filter” (pp. 244, 246) for

information on cleaning the low-pass filter.

Lens contacts: Keep the lens contacts clean.

Do not touch the shutter curtain: The shutter

curtain is extremely thin and easily damaged.

Under no circumstances should you exert

pressure on the curtain, poke it with cleaning

tools, or subject it to powerful air currents

from a blower. These actions could scratch,

deform, or tear the curtain.

Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun: Do not

leave the lens pointed at the sun or other

strong light source for an extended period.

Intense light may cause the image sensor to

deteriorate or produce a white blur effect in

photographs.

The shutter curtain may appear to be

Turn the product off before removing or disconnecting

the power source: Do not unplug the product or

remove the battery while the product is on or

while images are being recorded or deleted.

Forcibly cutting power in these

unevenly colored, but this has no affect on

pictures and does not indicate a malfunction.

circumstances could result in loss of data or

in damage to product memory or internal

circuitry. To prevent an accidental

interruption of power, avoid carrying the

product from one location to another while

the AC adapter is connected.

248

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Storage: To prevent mold or mildew, store the

camera in a dry, well-ventilated area. If the

product will not be used for an extended

period, remove the battery to prevent

leakage and store the camera in a plastic bag

containing a desiccant. Do not, however,

store the camera case in a plastic bag, as this

may cause the material to deteriorate. Note

that desiccant gradually loses its capacity to

absorb moisture and should be replaced at

regular intervals.

Batteries: Dirt on the battery terminals can

prevent the camera from functioning and

should be removed with a soft, dry cloth

before use.

Batteries may leak or explode if improperly

handled. Observe the following precautions

when handling batteries:

Turn the product off before replacing the

battery.

The battery may become hot when used for

extended periods. Observe due caution

when handling the battery.

To prevent mold or mildew, take the camera

out of storage at least once a month. Turn

the camera on and release the shutter a few

times before putting it away.

Use only batteries approved for use in this

equipment.

Store the battery in a cool, dry place. Replace

the terminal cover before putting the battery

away.

Do not expose the battery to flame or

excessive heat.

After removing the battery from the camera,

be sure to replace the terminal cover.

Notes on the monitor: The monitor may contain

a few pixels that are always lit or that do not

light. This is common to all TFT LCD monitors

and does not indicate a malfunction. Images

recorded with the product are unaffected.

Charge the battery before use. When taking

photographs on important occasions, ready

a spare EN-EL3e battery and keep it fully

charged. Depending on your location, it may

be difficult to purchase replacement

batteries on short notice.

Images in the monitor may be difficult to see

in a bright light.

Do not apply pressure to the monitor, as this

could cause damage or malfunction. Dust or

lint on the monitor can be removed with a

blower. Stains can be removed by wiping

lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather.

Should the monitor break, care should be

taken to avoid injury from broken glass and

to prevent liquid crystal from the monitor

touching the skin or entering the eyes and

mouth.

On cold days, the capacity of batteries tends

to decrease. Be sure the battery is fully

charged before taking photographs outside

in cold weather. Keep a spare battery in a

warm place and exchange the two as

necessary. Once warmed, a cold battery may

recover some of its charge.

Continuing to charge the battery after it is

fully charged can impair battery

performance.

Replace the monitor cover when

transporting the camera or leaving it

unattended.

Used batteries are a valuable resource.

Please recycle used batteries in accord with

local regulations.

249

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Troubleshooting

If the camera fails to function as expected, check the list of common problems below

before consulting your retailer or Nikon representative. Refer to the page numbers in

the right-most column for more information.

Display

Problem

Solution

Adjust viewfinder focus or use optional eyepiece

correction lenses.

Page

Viewfinder is out of focus.

Viewfinder is dark.

Insert a fully-charged battery.

Choose longer delays for Custom Setting c2 (Auto 179,

Displays turn off without warning.

meter-off delay) or c4 (Monitor off delay).

See “A Note on Electronically-Controlled

Cameras,” below.

180

Unusual characters displayed in

control panel.

250

Displays in control panel or

viewfinder are unresponsive and

dim.

Fine lines are visible around active

focus point or display turns red

when focus point is highlighted.

The response times and brightness of these

displays varies with temperature.

—

These phenomena are normal for this type of

viewfinder and do not indicate a malfunction.

A ^{A Note on Electronically-Controlled Cameras}

In extremely rare instances, unusual characters may appear in the control panel and the

camera may stop functioning. In most cases, this phenomenon is caused by a strong external

static charge. Turn the camera off, remove and replace the battery, taking care to avoid burns,

and turn the camera on again, or, if you are using an AC adapter (available separately),

disconnect and reconnect the adapter and turn the camera on again. In the event of

continued malfunction, contact your retailer or Nikon-authorized service representative. Note

that disconnecting the power source as described above may result in loss of any data not

recorded to the memory card at the time the problem occurred. Data already recorded to the

card will not be affected.

250

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Shooting (All Modes)

Problem

Solution

Page

Camera takes time to turn

on.

Delete files or folders.

—

• Memory card is full or not inserted.

• CPU lens with aperture ring attached but aperture not

locked at highest f-number.

29, 35

Shutter-release disabled.

• Mode dial rotated to S with shutter speed set to A.

Final photo is larger than Viewfinder horizontal and vertical frame coverage is

area shown in viewfinder. approximately 95%.

—

• Rotate focus-mode selector to AF.

• Camera unable to focus using autofocus: use manual

57, 59

Photos are out of focus.

focus or focus lock.

Focus does not lock when Use AE-L/AF-L button to lock focus when AF-C autofocus

shutter-release button is mode is selected or when photographing moving subjects 54

pressed halfway.

Image size can not be

changed.

in AF-A mode.

Image quality set to NEF (RAW).

• Unlock focus selector lock.

• Auto-area selected for AF-area mode: choose another

173

Can not select focus point

mode.

• Press shutter-release button halfway to turn monitor off 35

or activate exposure meters.

Camera is slow to record

photos.

Turn long exposure noise reduction off.

167

• Choose lower ISO sensitivity or turn high ISO noise

reduction on.

• Shutter speed is slower than 8 s: use long exposure noise 167

reduction.

74,

167

Randomly-spaced bright

pixels (“noise”) appear in

photos.

• Mode dial rotated to l or m: select another mode.

• AF-assist lamp does not light for continuous-servo

autofocus. Choose AF-S. In single-point, dynamic-area, or

3D-tracking AF, select center focus point.

AF-assist illuminator does

not light.

•

Off selected for Custom Setting a3 (Built-in AF-assist

174

—

illuminator).

• Illuminator has turned off automatically. Illuminator

may become hot with continued use; wait for lamp to

cool down.

• Replace battery in remote control.

• Choose remote control mode.

• Flash is charging.

• Time selected for Custom Setting c5 (Remote on

duration) has passed: reselect remote control mode.

• Bright light is interfering with remote.

• Clean lens.

241

No photo taken when

remote control shutter-

release button is pressed.

180

—

244

Photos are blotched or

smeared.

• Clean low-pass filter.

251

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Shooting (i, j, k, l, m, n, and o modes)

Problem

Menu item can not be

selected.

Solution

Page

Some options are not available in all modes.

—

Shooting (P, S, A, M)

Problem

Solution

Page

• Flash is charging.

• Non-CPU lens is attached: rotate camera mode dial to M. 83

Shutter-release disabled.

• Mode dial rotated to S after shutter speed of A or

& selected in mode M: choose new shutter speed.

Flash in use. If On is selected for Custom Setting e5 (Auto

Full range of shutter

speeds not available.

FP) in modes P, S, A, and M, optional SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, 195

and SB-R200 flash units can be used at all shutter speeds.

• Adjust white balance to match light source.

• Adjust Set Picture Control settings.

108

Colors are unnatural.

Can not measure white

balance.

Subject is too dark or too bright.

102

Image can not be selected

as source for preset white Image was not created with D90.

balance.

104

• NEF (RAW) or NEF+JPEG image quality option selected

for image quality.

• Multiple exposure mode is in effect.

White balance bracketing

unavailable.

121

Effects of Picture Control A (auto) is selected for sharpening, contrast, or saturation.

differ from image to

image.

For consistent results over a series of photographs, choose 111

a setting other than A (auto).

Metering can not be

changed.

Autoexposure lock is in effect.

Exposure compensation

can not be used.

Only one shot taken each

time shutter-release

button is pressed in

continuous shooting

mode.

Choose exposure mode P, S, or A.

Lower built-in flash.

Reddish areas appear in

photos.

Textures are uneven.

Reddish areas and uneven textures may appear in long

time-exposures. Turn long exposure noise reduction on

when shooting at shutter speeds of A.

167

252

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Playback

Problem

Flashing areas appear in

images

Solution

Page

Shooting data appear on Press 1or 3to choose photo information displayed, or

129,

163

images

change settings for Display mode.

A graph appears during

playback.

NEF (RAW) image is not

played back.

Photo was taken at image quality of NEF + JPEG.

Some photos are not

displayed during

playback.

Select All for Playback folder. Note that Current is

automatically selected after photograph is taken.

162

• Select On for Rotate tall.

• Photo was taken with Off selected for Auto image

rotation.

163

205

“Tall” (portrait) orientation

photos are displayed in

“wide” (landscape)

orientation.

• Camera orientation was changed while shutter-release

button was pressed in continuous release mode.

• Photo is displayed in image review.

128

• Camera was pointed up or down when photo was taken. 205

Photo is protected: remove protection.

Memory card is locked.

Can not delete photo.

139

Message is displayed

stating that no images are

available for playback.

Can not change print

order.

Select All for Playback folder. Note that Current is

162

automatically selected after photograph is taken.

Memory card is full: delete photos.

Memory card is locked.

Photo is in NEF (RAW) format. Create JPEG copy using NEF

(RAW) processing or transfer to computer and print using 150

supplied software or Capture NX 2.

Can not select photo for

printing.

Photo is not displayed on

TV.

Photo is not displayed on

high-definition video

device.

Choose correct video mode.

203

147

240

Confirm that HDMI cable (available separately) is

connected.

NEF (RAW) photos not

displayed in Capture NX.

Update to Capture NX 2.

Image sensor cleaning changes the position of dust on the

low-pass filter. Dust off reference data recorded before

image sensor cleaning is performed can not be used with

photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is

performed. Dust off reference data recorded after image

sensor cleaning is performed can not be used with

photographs taken before image sensor cleaning is

performed.

Image Dust Off option in

Capture NX 2 does not

have desired effect.

206

253

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Miscellaneous

Problem

Date of recording is not

correct.

Solution

Page

Set camera clock.

Some options are not available at certain combinations of

settings or when no memory card is inserted. Note that

Battery info option is not available when camera is

Menu item can not be

selected.

208

254

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Error Messages

This section lists the indicators and error messages that appear in the viewfinder,

control panel, and monitor.

Indicator

Control panel Viewfinder

Problem

Solution

Page

Lens aperture ring is not set to Set ring to minimum aperture

(blinks)

minimum aperture.

Low battery.

(largest f-number).

Ready a fully-charged spare

battery.

• Battery exhausted.

• Battery can not be used.

• Recharge or replace battery.

• Use Nikon-approved battery,

or contact Nikon-authorized

service representative.

• Replace the battery, or

recharge the battery if the 22, 23

rechargeable Li-ion battery

(blinks)

• An extremely exhausted

rechargeable Li-ion battery

or a third-party battery is

xviii,

inserted either in the camera is exhausted.

or in the optional MB-D80

battery pack.

(blinks)

—

Camera clock is not set.

Set camera clock.

230

(blinks)

• No lens attached.

• Non-CPU lens attached.

Camera unable to focus using

• Attach non-IX Nikkor lens.

• Select mode M.

—

Focus manually.

(blinks) autofocus.

• Use a lower ISO sensitivity

• Use optional ND filter

240

Subject too bright; photo will • In exposure mode:

be overexposed. S Increase shutter speed

A Choose a smaller aperture 82

(larger f-number)

• Use a higher ISO sensitivity

• Use flash

Subject too dark; photo will be • In exposure mode:

underexposed.

S Lower shutter speed

A Choose a larger aperture

(smaller f-number)

(blinks)

A selected in exposure

mode S.

& selected in exposure

mode S.

Change shutter speed or select

manual exposure mode.

Change shutter speed or select

manual exposure mode.

81, 83

(blinks)

Optional flash unit that does

not support i-TTL flash control

attached and set to TTL.

Change flash mode setting on

optional flash unit.

236

(blinks)

255

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Indicator

Control panel Viewfinder

Problem

Solution

Page

If indicator blinks for 3 s after Check photo in monitor; if

—

flash fires, photo may be

underexposed.

underexposed, adjust settings 128

and try again.

(blinks)

Memory insufficient to record

further photos at current

(blinks) settings, or camera has run out

of file or folder numbers.

• Reduce quality or size.

• Delete photographs.

• Insert new memory card.

62, 63

162

(blinks)

m S No memory card.

Insert memory card.

Release shutter. If error persists

or appears frequently, consult

Nikon-authorized service

representative.

(blinks)

Camera malfunction.

—

Indicator

Control panel/

Monitor

viewfinder

Problem

Solution

Page

Camera cannot detect Turn camera off and confirm

No memory card.

m S memory card.

that card is correctly inserted.

• Use approved card.

• Check that contacts are

clean. If card is damaged,

contact retailer or Nikon

representative.

242

—

Error accessing

This memory card

cannot be used.

Card may be damaged.

Insert another card.

memory card.

)

(blinks)

Unable to create new Delete files or insert new

29,

folder.

memory card.

162

This card is not

formatted.

Format the card.

Memory card has not

been formatted for use

in camera.

Format memory card or insert

new memory card.

29, 30

(blinks)

Select folder containing

images from Playback folder 29,

menu or insert different

memory card.

No images can be played

back until another folder has

been selected or Hide image 162

used to allow at least one

image to be displayed.

No images on memory

card or in folder(s)

selected for playback.

Folder contains no

images.

—

162

All photos in current

folder are hidden.

All images are hidden.

File has been created

or modified using a

computer or different

make of camera, or file

is corrupt.

File does not contain

image data.

File can not be played back

on camera.

—

256

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Indicator

Control panel/

viewfinder

)

(blinks)

Monitor

Problem

Solution

Page

Memory card is locked.

Slide lock to “write”

position.

Memory card is locked Slide card write-protect

(write protected). switch to “write” position.

Memory card does not Images created with other

contain images that devices can not be

Cannot select this file.

—

209

can be retouched.

Memory card does not

contain NEF (RAW)

images.

retouched.

No images for

retouching.

Take NEF (RAW )

photographs.

Check printer. To resume,

select Continue (if available).

Paper in printer is not Insert paper of correct size

Check printer.

Check paper.

Paper jam.

—

Printer error.

150 ^*

of selected size.

Paper is jammed in

printer.

and select Continue.

Clear jam and select

Continue.

Insert paper of selected size

and select Continue.

Check ink. To resume, select

Continue.

Out of paper.

Check ink supply.

Out of ink.

Printer is out of paper.

Ink error.

Replace ink and select

Continue.

Printer is out of ink.

* See printer manual for more information.

257

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix

The Appendix covers the following topics:

• Available Settings and Defaults........................................................................................... 258

• Memory Card Capacity ........................................................................................................... 262

• Exposure Program .................................................................................................................... 263

• Bracketing Programs ............................................................................................................... 264

• Flash Control............................................................................................................................... 265

• Shutter Speeds Available with the Built-in Flash........................................................... 265

• Aperture, Sensitivity, and Flash Range.............................................................................. 266

Available Settings and Defaults

The following table lists the settings that can be adjusted in each mode:

Set Picture Control

Image quality ¹

✔

Image size ¹

White balance ¹

ISO sensitivity settings ¹

Active D-Lighting

Color space

✔

Long exp. NR

High ISO NR

Active folder

Multiple exposure ¹

Movie setting

Shooting mode¹

Autofocus mode ¹

Metering ¹

Flexible program ¹

Autoexposure lock ¹

Exposure compensation ¹

Bracketing ¹

Flash mode ¹

Metering ¹

a1: AF-area mode

a2: Center focus point

a3: Built-in AF-assist illuminator

a4: AF point illumination

a5: Focus point wrap-around

a6: AE-L/AF-L for MB-D80

a7: Live view autofocus ¹

✔

2, 3

✔

258

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

b1: EV steps for exposure cntrl.

b2: Easy exposure compensation

b3: Center-weighted area

b4: Fine tune optimal exposure

c1: Shutter-release button AE-L

c2: Auto meter-off delay

c3: Self-timer

c4: Monitor off delay

c5: Remote on duration

d1: Beep

d2: Viewfinder grid display

d3: ISO display and adjustment

d4: Viewfinder warning display

d5: Screen tips

d6: CL mode shooting speed

d7: File number sequence

d8: Shooting info display

d9: LCD illumination

d10: Exposure delay mode

d11: Flash warning

d12: MB-D80 battery type

e1: Flash shutter speed

e2: Flash cntrl for built-in flash

e3: Modeling flash

✔

e4: Auto bracketing set

e5: Auto FP

e6: Bracketing order

f1: D switch

✔

f2: OK button (shooting mode)

f3: Assign FUNC. button

f4: Assign AE-L/AF-L button

f5: Customize command dials

f6: No memory card?

f7: Reverse indicators

1 Reset with two-button reset (pg. 75).

2 Reset with when mode dial is rotated to new setting.

3 Available with optional flash units only.

4 Reset with Custom Setting A (Reset Custom Settings).

259

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The following defaults are restored with Custom Setting A (Reset Custom Settings;

the following table lists the defaults for P, S, A, and M modes). For a list of the settings

restored with a two-button reset, see page 172.

Option

Default

Auto-area

Normal zone

a1: AF-area mode

a2: Center focus point

a3: Built-in AF-assist illuminator

a4: AF point illumination

a5: Focus point wrap-around

a6: AE-L/AF-L for MB-D80

a7: Live view autofocus

b1: EV steps for exposure cntrl.

b2: Easy exposure compensation

b3: Center-weighted area

b4: Fine tune optimal exposure

c1: Shutter-release button AE-L

c2: Auto meter-off delay

c3: Self-timer

Auto

No wrap

AE/AF lock

Wide area

1/3 step

Off

φ 8 mm

Off

6 s

Self-timer delay

Number of shots

10 s

c4: Monitor off delay

Playback

10 s

Menus

20 s

Shooting info display

Image review

10 s

4 s

c5: Remote on duration

d1: Beep

1 min

d2: Viewfinder grid display

d3: ISO display and adjustment

d4: Viewfinder warning display

d5: Screen tips

Off

Show frame count

d6: CL mode shooting speed

d7: File number sequence

d8: Shooting info display

d9: LCD illumination

3 fps

Off

Auto

Off

d10: Exposure delay mode

d11: Flash warning

Off

d12: MB-D80 battery type

LR6 (AA alkaline)

260

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Option

e1: Flash shutter speed

Default

1/60 s

e2: Flash cntrl for built-in flash

e3: Modeling flash

TTL

Off

e4: Auto bracketing set

e5: Auto FP

AE & flash

Off

e6: Bracketing order

f1: D switch

MTR > under > over

LCD backlight (D)

Select center focus point

FV lock

f2: OK button (shooting mode)

f3: Assign FUNC. button

f4: Assign AE-L/AF-L button

f5: Customize command dials

Reverse rotation

AE/AF lock

Change main/sub

Off

Menus and playback

f6: No memory card?

f7: Reverse indicators

Release locked

261

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Memory Card Capacity

The following table shows the approximate number of pictures that can be stored on

a 2 GB Panasonic Pro HIGH SPEED card at different image quality and size settings.

Image quality

Image size

File size ¹

16.9 MB

14.4 MB

12.4 MB

13.9 MB

12.6 MB

11.6 MB

12.3 MB

11.7 MB

11.2 MB

10.8 MB

6.0 MB

3.4 MB

1.6 MB

3.0 MB

1.7 MB

0.8 MB

1.5 MB

0.9 MB

0.4 MB

No. of images ¹

Buffer capacity ²

—

NEF +

104

118

106

116

124

118

123

128

133

271

480

1000

539

JPEG fine ³

NEF +

JPEG normal ³

NEF +

JPEG basic ³

NEF (RAW)

JPEG fine

100

JPEG normal

JPEG basic

931

2000

1000

1800

3800

1 All figures are approximate. File size varies with scene recorded.

2 Maximum number of exposures that can be stored in memory buffer. Drops if ISO sensitivity is set to

P or higher, High ISO NR is on when ISO sensitivity is set to 800 or higher, or long exposure noise

reduction or Active D-lighting is on.

3 Image size applies to JPEG images only. Size of NEF (RAW) images can not be changed. File size is the

total for NEF (RAW) and JPEG images.

A ^{Custom Setting d6: CL mode shooting speed (pg. 182)}

The maximum number of photographs that can be taken in a single burst can be set to any

amount between 1 and 4.

262

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Exposure Program

The exposure program for programmed auto is shown in the following graph:

F (lens focal length) ≤ 55 mm

55mm < F ≤ 135 mm

135 mm < F

f1.4

f2.8

f5.6

f11

f16

f22

f32

Shutter speed

The maximum and minimum values for EV vary with ISO sensitivity; the above graph

assumes an ISO sensitivity of ISO 200 equivalent. When matrix metering is used,

values over 17¹/3 EV are reduced to 17¹/3 EV.

263

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Bracketing Programs

The number of shots and bracketing increment are shown in the control panel as

follows:

Number of frames

Bracketing increment

Bracketing progress

indicator

❚❚The Bracketing Progress Indicator and Number of Frames

Number of frames

Progress indicator

Description

3 frames: unmodified, negative, positive ^*

2 frames: unmodified, positive

2 frames: unmodified, negative ^*

* Order when Under > MTR > over is selected for Custom Setting e6 (Bracketing order) is negative,

unmodified, positive (three frames) or negative, unmodified (two frames).

❚❚Bracketing Increment

Autoexposure and flash bracketing

“EV steps for exposure cntrl.” set to 1/3 EV “EV steps for exposure cntrl.” set to 1/2 EV

White balance

bracketing

Display

Increment

¹/3EV

Display

Increment

¹/2EV

1EV

1¹/2EV

2EV

Display Increment

²/3EV

1EV

1 ¹/3EV

1 ²/3EV

2EV

264

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Flash Control

The following types of flash control are supported when a CPU lens is used in

combination with the built-in flash or optional SB-900, SB-800, or SB-600 flash units

(pp. 73, 234).

•

i-TTL Balanced Fill-Flash for Digital SLR: Flash output is adjusted for a natural balance

between the main subject and the background.

•

Standard i-TTL Fill-Flash for Digital SLR: Flash output is adjusted for the main subject; the

brightness of the background is not taken into account. Recommended for shots

in which the main subject is emphasized at the expense of background details, or

when exposure compensation is used.

Standard i-TTL flash control is used with spot metering or when selected with the

optional flash unit. i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR is used in all other cases.

Shutter Speeds Available with the Built-in Flash

The following shutter speeds are available with the built-in flash when vibration

reduction (VR) is not used.

Mode

i, k, P * , A *

Shutter speed

¹/200–¹/60 s

¹/200–¹/125 s

Mode

Shutter speed

¹/200–1 s

¹/200–30 s

S, M

Slowest shutter speed at which flash will be used can be selected using Custom Setting e1 (Flash

shutter speed). Flash will still fire at shutter speeds as slow as 30 s when set to slow sync.

265

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Aperture, Sensitivity, and Flash Range

Flash range varies with sensitivity (ISO equivalency) and aperture.

Aperture at ISO equivalent of

Range

200

1.4

2.8

5.6

400

2.8

5.6

800

2.8

5.6

1600

5.6

—

3200

5.6

—

ft.

1.0–8.5

0.7–6.1

0.6–4.2

0.6–3.0

0.6–2.1

0.6–1.5

0.6–1.1

0.6–0.8

3ft. 3in.–27ft. 11in.

2ft. 4in.–20ft.

2ft.–13ft. 9in.

2ft.–9ft. 10in.

2ft.–6ft. 11in.

2ft.–4ft. 11in.

2ft.–3ft. 7in.

2ft.–2ft. 7in.

In the following modes, the maximum aperture (minimum f-number) is limited

according to ISO sensitivity when the built-in flash is used:

Maximum aperture at ISO sensitivity of

Mode

P, i, k, o

200

2.8

5.6

400

3.3

6.7

800

1600

4.8

9.5

3200

5.6

For each one-step increase in sensitivity (e.g., from 200 to 400), aperture is stopped

down by half an f/-stop. If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given

above, the maximum value for aperture will be the maximum aperture of the lens.

266

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Specifications

❚❚Nikon D90 Digital Camera

Type

Lens mount

Single-lens reflex digital camera

Nikon F mount (with AF coupling and AF contacts)

Effective picture angle Approx. 1.5 × lens focal length (Nikon DX format)

Effective pixels

12.3 million

Image sensor

Total pixels

23.6 × 15.8 mm CMOS sensor

12.9 million

Dust-reduction System Image sensor cleaning, Image Dust Off reference data (optional

Capture NX 2 software required)

Storage

Image size (pixels)

• 4,288 × 2,848 (L)

• 3,216 × 2,136 (M)

• 2,144 × 1,424 (S)

File format

•

NEF (RAW)

JPEG: JPEG-Baseline compliant with fine (approx. 1 : 4), normal (approx.

1 : 8), or basic (approx. 1 : 16) compression

•

NEF (RAW)+JPEG: Single photograph recorded in both NEF (RAW) and

JPEG formats

Picture Control System Can be selected from Standard, Neutral, Vivid, Monochrome, Landscape,

Portrait; storage for up to nine custom Picture Controls

Media

File system

SD (Secure Digital) memory cards, SDHC-compliant

DCF (Design Rule for Camera File System) 2.0, DPOF (Digital Print Order

Format), Exif 2.21 (Exchangeable Image File Format for Digital Still

Cameras), PictBridge

Viewfinder

Eye-level pentaprism single-lens reflex viewfinder

Approx. 96% horizontal and 96% vertical

Frame coverage

Magnification

Eyepoint

Diopter adjustment

Focusing screen

Approx. 0.94 × (50mm f/1.4 lens at infinity, –1.0 m^–1

)

19.5 mm (–1.0 m^–1

–2–+1 m^–1

)

Type B BriteView Clear Matte Mark II screen with focus frame (framing

grid can be displayed)

Reflex mirror

Quick return

Depth-of-field preview When depth-of-field preview button is pressed, lens aperture is stopped

down to value selected by user (A and M modes) or by camera (other

modes)

Lens aperture

Instant return, electronically controlled

267

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Lens

Compatible lenses

•

DX AF Nikkor: All functions supported

Type G or D AF Nikkor: All functions supported (PC Micro-Nikkor does not

support some functions). IX Nikkor lenses not supported.

Other AF Nikkor: All functions supported except 3D color matrix

metering II. Lenses for F3AF not supported.

•

AI-P Nikkor: All functions supported except 3D color matrix metering II

Non-CPU: Autofocus not supported. Can be used in exposure mode M,

but exposure meter does not function. Electronic rangefinder can be

used if lens has a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.

Shutter

Type

Speed

Flash sync speed

Electronically-controlled vertical-travel focal-plane shutter

¹/4000 – 30 s in steps of ¹/3 or ¹/2 EV, bulb

X=¹/200 s; synchronizes with shutter at ¹/200 s or slower

Release

Release mode

8 (single frame), ! (continuous low speed), 9 (continuous high

speed), $ (self-timer), " (delayed remote), # (quick response)

9 : Up to 4.5 fps

! : 1 fps–4 fps

Can be selected from 2, 5, 10, and 20 s duration

Frame advance rate

Self-timer

Exposure

Metering

TTL exposure metering using 420-segment RGB sensor

Metering method

•

Matrix: 3D color matrix metering II (type G and D lenses); color matrix

metering II (other CPU lenses)

Center-weighted: Weight of 75% given to 6, 8, or 10-mm circle in center

of frame

Spot: Meters 3.5-mm circle (about 2% of frame) centered on selected

focus point

Range (ISO 100, f/1.4

lens, 20 °C/68 °F)

Exposure meter

coupling

•

Matrix or center-weighted metering: 0–20 EV

Spot metering: 2–20 EV

CPU

Mode

Auto modes (i auto; j auto (flash off)); scene modes (k portrait;

l landscape; n close-up; m sports; o night portrait); programmed auto

with flexible program (P); shutter-priority auto (S); aperture-priority auto

(A); manual (M)

Exposure

compensation

–5 – +5 EV in increments of ¹/3 or ¹/2 EV

Exposure bracketing 2 or 3 frames in steps of ¹/3, ¹/2, ²/3, 1, or 2 EV

Flash bracketing

White balance

bracketing

2 or 3 frames in steps of ¹/3, ¹/2, ²/3, 1, or 2 EV

2 or 3 frames in steps of 1, 2, or 3

ADL bracketing

Exposure lock

2 frames

Luminosity locked at detected value with AE-L/AF-L button

268

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Exposure

ISO sensitivity

(Recommended

Exposure Index)

Active D-Lighting

ISO 200 – 3200 in steps of ¹/3 EV. Can also be set to approx. 0.3, 0.7, or

1 EV (ISO 100 equivalent) below ISO 200 or to approx. 0.3, 0.7, or 1 EV (ISO

6400 equivalent) above ISO 3200.

Can be selected from Auto, Extra high, High, Normal, Low, or Off

Focus

Autofocus

Nikon Multi-CAM 1000 autofocus module with TTL phase detection, 11

focus points (including one cross-type sensor), and AF-assist illuminator

(range approx. 0.5–3 m/1 ft. 8 in.–9 ft. 10 in.)

Detection range

Lens servo

–1 – +19 EV (ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F)

•

Autofocus (AF): Instant single-servo AF (AF-S); continuous-servo AF (AF-C);

auto AF-S/AF-C selection (AF-A); predictive focus tracking activated

automatically according to subject status

•

Manual (M): Electronic rangefinder can be used

Focus point

AF-area mode

Focus lock

Can be selected from 11 focus points

Single-point, dynamic-area, auto-area, 3D-tracking (11 points)

Focus can be locked by pressing shutter-release button halfway (single-

servo AF) or by pressing AE-L/AF-L button

269

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Flash

Built-in flash

i, k, n, o : Auto flash with auto pop-up

P, S, A, M: Manual pop-up with button release

Guide Number (m/ft)

at 20 °C/(68 °F)

Flash control

•

At ISO 200: Approx. 17/56, 18/59 with manual flash

At ISO 100: Approx. 12/39, 13/43 with manual flash

TTL: i-TTL balanced fill-flash and standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR

using 420-segment RGB sensor are available with built-in flash and

SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, or SB-400

•

Auto aperture: Available with SB-900, SB-800 and CPU lens

Non-TTL auto: Supported flash units include SB-900, SB-800, SB-28,

SB-27, and SB-22s

•

Range-priority manual: Available with SB-900 and SB-800

Flash mode

• i, k, n: Auto, auto with red-eye reduction; fill-flash and red-eye

reduction available with optional flash units

• o: Auto slow sync, auto slow sync with red-eye reduction; slow sync

and slow sync with red-eye reduction available with optional flash

units

• l, m: Fill-flash and red-eye reduction available with optional flash

units

•

P, A: Fill-flash, rear-curtain with slow sync, auto slow sync, slow sync

with red-eye reduction, red-eye reduction

•

S, M: Fill-flash, rear-curtain sync, red-eye reduction

Flash compensation

–3 – +1 EV in increments of ¹/3 or ¹/2 EV

Flash-ready indicator Lights when built-in flash or optional flash unit such as SB-900, SB-800,

SB-600, SB-400, SB-80DX, SB-28DX, or SB-50DX is fully charged; blinks for

3 s after flash is fired at full output in i-TTL or auto aperture modes

Accessory shoe

Standard ISO 518 hot-shoe contact with safety lock

Nikon Creative Lighting Advanced Wireless Lighting supported with built-in flash, SB-900,

System (CLS)

SB-800, or SU-800 as commander and SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, or SB-R200

as remotes; Auto FP High-Speed Sync and modeling illumination

supported with all CLS-compatible flash units except SB-400; Flash Color

Information Communication and FV lock supported with all CLS-

compatible flash units

White balance

Auto (TTL white-balance with main image sensor and 420 segment RGB

sensor); 12 manual modes with fine-tuning; color temperature setting;

preset white balance; white balance bracketing

Live view

AF modes

Autofocus

Face-priority, wide area, normal area

Contrast-detect AF anywhere in frame (camera selects focus point

automatically when face-priority AF is selected)

270

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Movie

Image size (pixels)

• 1,280 × 720/24 fps

• 320 × 216/24 fps

AVI

• 640 × 424/24 fps

File format

Compression

Motion-JPEG

Monitor

3-in., approx. 920k-dot (VGA), low-temperature polysilicon TFT LCD with

170 ° viewing angle, approx. 100% frame coverage, and brightness

adjustment

Playback

Full-frame and thumbnail (4, 9, or 72 images or calendar) playback with

playback zoom, movie playback, Pictmotion, slide show, histogram

display, highlights, auto image rotation, and image comment (up to 36

characters)

Interface

USB

Hi-Speed USB

Video output

Can be selected from NTSC and PAL; images can be displayed on

external device while camera monitor is on

Type C HDMI connector; camera monitor turns off when HDMI cable is

connected.

HDMI output

Accessory terminal

Remote cord: MC-DC2 (available separately)

GPS unit: GP-1 (available separately)

Supported languages

Supported languages Chinese (Simplified and Traditional), Danish, Dutch, English, Finnish,

French, German, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Norwegian, Polish,

Portuguese, Russian, Spanish, Swedish

271

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Power source

Battery

One rechargeable Li-ion EN-EL3e battery

Battery pack

Optional MB-D80 multi-power battery pack with one or two

rechargeable Nikon EN-EL3e batteries or six AA alkaline, NiMH, lithium,

or nickel-manganese batteries; AA batteries (available separately);

optional MS-D200 battery holder is required when using AA batteries.

EH-5a or EH-5 AC adapter (available separately)

AC adapter

Tripod socket

¹/4 in. (ISO 1222)

Dimensions/weight

Dimensions

(W × H × D)

Weight

Approx. 132 × 103 × 77 mm (5.2 × 4.1 × 3.0 in.)

Approx. 620 g (1 lb. 6 oz.) without battery, memory card, body cap, or

monitor cover

Operating environment

Temperature

0–40 °C (32–104 °F)

Humidity

Less than 85% (no condensation)

• Unless otherwise stated, all figures are for a camera with a fully-charged battery operating at

an ambient temperature of 20 °C (68 °F).

• Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software

described in this manual at any time and without prior notice. Nikon will not be held liable

for damages that may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain.

MH-18a quick charger

Rated input

AC 100–240 V (50/60 Hz)

Rated output

DC 8.4 V/900 mA

Supported batteries

Charging time

Nikon EN-EL3e rechargeable Li-ion battery

Approx. 2 hours and 15 minutes when battery is fully discharged

Operating temperature 0–40 °C (+32–104 °F)

Dimensions

Approx. 90 × 35 × 58 mm (3.5 × 1.4 × 2.3 in.)

(W × H × D)

Length of cord

Weight

Approx. 1800 mm (5 ft. 11 in.)

Approx. 80 g (2.8 oz.), excluding power cable

EN-EL3e rechargeable Li-ion battery

Type

Rechargeable lithium-ion battery

Rated capacity

Dimensions

(W × H × D)

Weight

7.4 V/1500 mAh

Approx. 39.5 × 56 × 21 mm (1.6 × 2.2 × 0.8 in.)

Approx. 80 g (2.8 oz.), excluding terminal cover

272

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR lens

Type

G-type AF-S DX Zoom-NIKKOR VR lens with built-in CPU and Nikon

bayonet mount

Supported cameras

Focal length

Nikon digital SLR cameras (DX format)

18–105mm

Maximum aperture

Construction

f/3.5–5.6

15 elements in 11 groups (including 1 ED glass element and 1 aspherical

element)

Picture angle

76 °–15 ° 20 ´

Focal length scale (mm) 18, 24, 35, 50, 75, 105

Distance information Output to camera

Zoom control

Focusing

Zoom adjusted by rotating separate zoom ring

Autofocus with Silent Wave Motor; manual focus; manual focus

supported when A-M switch is set to A or M. Focus can be adjusted by

rotating lens focusing ring after locking focus in single-servo autofocus.

Do not use focusing ring while camera is focusing.

Vibration reduction

Lens-shift method using voice coil motors (VCMs)

Closest focus distance 0.45 m (1 ft. 5.7 in.) at all zoom settings

Diaphragm

Seven-blade diaphragm with rounded blades and fully automatic aperture

Aperture range

Metering

f/3.5–22 at 18 mm; f/5.6–38 at 105 mm

Maximum aperture

Attachment size

Dimensions

67 mm (P=0.75 mm)

Approx. 76 mm diameter × 89 mm/3.0 × 3.5 in. (from surface of bayonet

mount to end of lens)

Weight

Approx. 420 g (14.8 oz.)

Lens hood

HB-32 (available separately; attaches as shown below)

The following accessories can not be used: teleconverters (all types), PK auto extension rings

(all types), K rings (all types), BR-4 auto rings, bellow attachments (all types), and SX-1

attachment rings. Other accessories may also be incompatible. See the accessory manual for

details.

273

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

❚❚Supported Standards

•

DCF Version 2.0: The Design Rule for Camera File Systems (DCF) is a standard widely

used in the digital camera industry to ensure compatibility among different makes

of camera.

•

DPOF: Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) is an industry-wide standard that allows

pictures to be printed from print orders stored on the memory card.

Exif version 2.21: The D90 supports Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format for Digital

Still Cameras) version 2.21, a standard in which information stored with

photographs is used for optimal color reproduction when the images are output

on Exif-compliant printers.

•

PictBridge: A standard developed through cooperation with the digital camera and

printer industries, allowing photographs to be output directly to a printer without

first transferring them to a computer.

HDMI: High-Definition Multimedia Interface is a standard for multimedia interfaces

used in consumer electronics and AV devices capable of transmitting audiovisual

data and control signals to HDMI-compliant devices via a single cable connection.

274

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

D ^{Battery Life}

The number of shots that can be taken with fully-charged batteries varies with the condition of

the battery, temperature, and how the camera is used. In the case of AA batteries, capacity also

varies with make and storage conditions; some batteries can not be used. Sample figures for

the camera and optional MB-D80 multi-power battery pack are given below.

•

CIPA standard ¹

One EN-EL3e battery (camera): Approximately 850 shots

One EN-EL3e battery (MB-D80): Approximately 850 shots

Two EN-EL3e batteries (MB-D80): Approximately 1700 shots

six AA batteries (MB-D80): Approximately 600 shots

•

Nikon standard ²

One EN-EL3e battery (camera): Approximately 4200 shots

One EN-EL3e battery (MB-D80): Approximately 4200 shots

Two EN-EL3e batteries (MB-D80): Approximately 8400 shots

six AA batteries (MB-D80): Approximately 1900 shots

1 Measured at 23 °C/73.4 °F ( 2 °C/3.6 °F) with an AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED

VR lens under the following test conditions: lens cycled from infinity to minimum range

and one photograph taken at default settings once every 30 s; after photograph is taken,

monitor is turned on for 4 s; tester waits for exposure meters to turn off after monitor is

turned off; flash fired at full power once every other shot. Live view not used.

2 Measured at 20 °C/68 °F with an AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR lens under

the following test conditions: release mode set to 9, autofocus mode set to AF-C, image

quality set to JPEG basic, image size set to M (medium), white balance set to A, ISO

sensitivity set to ISO 200, shutter speed ¹/250 s, focus cycled from infinity to minimum range

three times after exposure meters have been on for 3 s; six shots are then taken in

succession and monitor turned on for 4 s and then turned off; cycle repeated once

exposure meters have turned off.

The following can reduce battery life:

• Using the monitor

• Keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway

• Repeated autofocus operations

• Taking NEF (RAW) photographs

• Slow shutter speeds

• Using VR (vibration reduction) mode with VR lenses

To ensure that you get the most from rechargeable Nikon EN-EL3e batteries:

• Keep the battery contacts clean. Soiled contacts can reduce battery performance.

• Use batteries immediately after charging. Batteries will lose their charge if left unused.

275

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

Menu items and options in the camera monitor are shown in bold.

AF-area mode, 57, 173

3D-tracking(11 points), 56, 173

auto-area, 36, 173

dynamic-area, 56, 173

single-point, 56, 173

AF-area mode, 173

A-M switch, 25

Amber, 97, 216

Aperture, 79

maximum, 60

minimum, 26, 78

Aperture-priority auto, 82

Assign AE-L/AF-L button, 200

Assign FUNC. button, 197

Audio video cable, 146

Auto bracketing, 92, 191, 193

Auto bracketing set, 191

ADL bracketing, 193

AE & flash, 191

AE only, 191

Flash only, 191

WB bracketing, 191

Auto FP, 195

Clock, 27, 204

battery, 28, 204

CLS, 233

Color balance, 216

Color space, 167

Adobe RGB, 167

sRGB, 167

Color temperature, 99

Computer, 148

Symbols

D switch, 196

i (Auto mode), 34

j (Auto (flash off) mode), 34

k (Portrait), 41

l (Landscape), 41

n (Close up), 42

m (Sports), 42

o (Night portrait), 42

P (Programmed auto), 80

S (Shutter-priority auto), 81

A (Aperture-priority auto), 82

M (Manual), 83

U (flexible program), 80

8 (Single frame), 64

! (Continuous low speed), 64,

65, 182

9 (Continuous high speed), 64,

$ (Self-timer), 66, 179

# (Remote control), 68

a (Live view), 43

a (Matrix), 87

Z (Center-weighted), 87

b (Spot), 87

N (flash-ready indicator), 9, 40

r (FV lock), 198

M (Bracketing indicator), 92, 191,

193

Control Panel, 7

CPU contacts, 228

CPU lens, 26, 229

Creative Lighting System, 233

Custom Settings, 171

Customize command dials, 201

Date and time, 27, 204

Daylight saving time, 27, 204

DCF version 2.0, 167, 274

Default settings, 75, 172, 260

restoring, 75, 172

Delete, 49, 140, 162

all images, 162

current image, 49, 140

selected images, 162

Delete, 162

All, 162

Select date, 162

Selected, 162

Depth-of-field, 82

Depth-of-field preview button, 82,

191

Digital Print Order Format, 150,

153, 157, 274

Auto image rotation, 205

Auto meter off, 35, 179

Auto meter-off delay, 179

Auto-area, 36, 173

Autofocus, 54, 55, 57

Backlight, 8, 183

Battery, 22, 23, 34, 184, 208

charging, 22

D (White balance), 95

W (White Balance Bracketing),

191

L (Preset manual), 100

E (Exposure Compensation), 90

7 (Flash Compensation), 91

B (“Clock not set” indicator), 28

3 (“Beep” indicator), 180

pack, 184, 208, 239

Battery info, 208

Beep, 180

Diopter, 32, 239

Display mode, 163

Distortion control, 222

D-Lighting, 212

Blue, 97

Numerics

Body cap, 3, 25, 240

Bracketing, 92, 191, 193

Active D-Lighting, 193

exposure, 92

3D color matrix metering II, 87

3D-tracking, 173

420-segment RGB sensor, 87

DPOF, 150, 153, 157, 274

Dynamic-area, 56, 173

Easy exposure compensation,

177

Electronic analog exposure

display, 84

EV steps for exposure cntrl., 177

Exif version 2.21, 167, 274

Exposure, 79, 88, 90

lock, 88

meters, 178

mode, 78

aperture-priority auto, 82

manual, 83

programmed auto, 80

flash, 92

white balance, 191

Bracketing order, 195

Built-in AF-assist illuminator,

174

Bulb, 85

Burst, 122

AC adapter, 239

Accessories, 239

Active D-Lighting, 119

Active folder, 169

adjustment control, 32

AE-L, 88

AE-L, 200

AE-L/AF-L button, 88

AE-L/AF-L button, 200

AE-L/AF-L for MB-D80, 176

AF, 54–56

AF assist, 38, 174, 231

AF point illumination, 175

Calendar, 136

Camera Control Pro 2, 148, 240

Center focus point, 174

Center-weighted area, 9, 178

CL mode shooting speed, 182

Clean image sensor, 244

276

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

shutter-priority auto, 81

program, 263

Exposure bracketing, 92, 191, 195

Exposure compensation, 90, 177

Exposure delay mode, 183

tracking, 56, 173

3D, 56, 173

Focus point wrap-around, 175

Focusing screen, 267

Format, 30, 202

Format memory card, 202

Front-curtain sync, 71

FV lock, 198

cap, rear, 25

compatible, 228

CPU, 26, 229

focus mode switch, 25

focus ring, 25

mounting index, 25

non-CPU, 230

removing, 26

type D, 228

type G, 228

VR switch, 25

Lens mount, 3, 60

Live view, 43, 50, 176

Live view autofocus, 176

Face priority, 176

Normal area, 176

Wide area, 176

Lock mirror up for cleaning, 246

Long exp. NR, 167

Long time-exposure with remote

control, 85

File information, 129

File number sequence, 182

Filter effects, 215

Blue intensifier, 215

Cross screen, 215

Green intensifier, 215

Red intensifier, 215

Skylight, 215

GPS, 124, 133, 241

connecting, 124

data, 133

GPS, 124

Green, 97

Warm filter, 215

Fine tune optimal exposure, 178

Firmware version, 208

Fisheye, 222

Flash, 40, 70, 71, 233

bracketing, 92

compensation, 91

control, 233, 265

i-TTL balanced-fill flash for

digital SLR, 265

standard i-TTL flash for digital

SLR, 265

mode, 71, 185

modeling, 191

monitor pre-flash, 233

range, 266

ready indicator, 198, 237

sync speed, 185

sync terminal, 238

Flash cntrl for built-in flash, 185

Commander mode, 188

Manual, 187

Repeating flash, 187

Flash shutter speed, 185

Flash Warning, 183

Flexible program, 80

Fn button, 197, 198

f-number, 82, 228

Focal length, 228

Focal length scale, 25

Focal plane mark, 60

Focus, 54, 55, 57, 59

autofocus, 54, 55, 57

electronic rangefinder, 60, 229

indicator, 38, 57, 60

lock, 57

H (Sensitivity), 74

HDMI, 147, 203, 274

HDMI, 203

Help, 18, 21

Hide image, 162

High definition, 147, 203, 274

High ISO NR, 168

Highlights, 131, 163

Histogram, 130, 163

M (Image size), 63

Magenta, 97, 216

Manage Picture Control, 113

Manual, 45, 59, 83

Manual focus, 45, 59

Matrix, 87

MB-D80, 184, 208, 239

MB-D80 battery type, 184

Memory buffer, 38, 64

Memory card, 29, 202, 242

capacity of, 262

formatting, 30, 202

Metering

center-weighted, 87

matrix, 87

spot, 87

Mired, 98

Mirror, 4, 246

lock up for cleaning, 246

Modeling flash, 191

Monitor, 5, 43, 128, 202

cover, 17

Monitor off delay, 180

Monochrome, 214

Black-and-white, 214

Cyanotype, 214

Sepia, 214

Mounting index, 25

Movie settings, 170

Quality, 170

Sound, 170

Movies, 50

Image comment, 205

Image Dust Off ref photo, 206

Image file, 274

Image overlay, 218

Image quality, 62

Image review, 163

Image size, 63

Index print, 156

In-focus indicator, 38, 57, 60

Information, 129, 163

ISO display and adjustment, 181

ISO sensitivity, 74, 166

ISO sensitivity, 74

ISO sensitivity auto control, 166

Maximum sensitivity, 166

Minimum shutter speed, 166

ISO sensitivity settings, 166

i-TTL, 188, 233, 265

JPEG, 61, 62

JPEG basic, 62

JPEG fine, 62

JPEG normal, 36, 62

L (Image size), 36, 63

L (Sensitivity), 74

Language, 27, 204

LCD, 8, 183, 202

LCD brightness, 202

LCD illumination, 183

Lens, 25, 26, 228

attaching, 25

Manual focus, 59

mode, 54

Auto select, 36, 54

continuous-servo AF, 54

selector, 54, 59

single-servo AF, 54

point, 45, 54, 57, 173, 174, 175

Multiple exposure, 121

MY MENU, 224

Add items, 225

Rank items, 226

cap, 25

277

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Menu items and options in the camera monitor are shown in bold.

Remove items, 225

delayed remote, 68

Quick-response remote, 68

self-timer, 66

cable, 149, 151

UTC, 27, 124, 133

NEF, 62

single-frame, 64

NEF (RAW), 62, 148, 220

NEF (RAW) processing, 220

Nikon Transfer, 148, 149

No memory card?, 201

Vibration Reduction, 26

Video, 146, 203

cable, 146

Remote Control, 64, 68, 241

Remote cord, 85, 241

Remote on duration, 180

Reset, 75, 172, 260

Reset custom settings, 172

Reverse indicators, 201

RGB, 130, 167

mode, 203

Video mode, 203

Viewfinder, 9, 32, 66, 267

eyepiece, 32, 66

eyepiece cap, 17, 66

focus, 32, 59

Viewfinder grid display, 181

Viewfinder warning display, 181

ViewNX, 148

OK button (shooting mode), 196

Optional flash, 185

Overview data, 134

RGB Histogram, 130

Rotate tall, 163

Photo info, 129, 163

PictBridge, 150, 274

Pictmotion, 141

Picture angle, 228

Picture Controls, 108

Playback, 48, 128

calendar, 136

S (Image size), 63

Screen tips, 182

Self-timer, 179

Sensitivity, 74, 166

Set Picture Control, 109

Landscape, 109

Monochrome, 109

Filter effects, 111, 112

Toning, 111, 112

Neutral, 109

WB, 95, 191

White balance, 95, 191

bracketing, 191

preset manual, 95

White balance, 95

Auto, 95

Choose color temp., 95, 99

Cloudy, 95

folder, 162

full-frame, 128

information, 129, 163

menu, 160

Pictmotion, 141

slide show, 143

thumbnail, 135

zoom, 138

Playback folder, 162

Preset Manual, 100

Print (DPOF), 153

Border, 155

Portrait, 109

Standard, 109

Vivid, 109

Direct sunlight, 95

Flash, 95

Fluorescent, 95

Incandescent, 95

Preset manual, 95, 100

Shade, 95

World time, 27, 204

Date and time, 27, 204

Date format, 28, 204

Daylight saving time, 27, 204

Time zone, 27, 204

Setup menu, 202

Shooting data, 131, 132

Shooting info display, 10, 183

Shooting menu, 165

Shutter-priority auto, 81

Shutter-release button, 38, 39, 57,

88, 179

half press, 38, 88

Shutter-release button AE-L,

179

Side-by-side comparison, 223

Single-point, 56, 173

Size, 63

Slide show, 143

Frame interval, 143

Slow sync, 71

Page size, 155

Start printing, 155

Time stamp, 155

Print select, 153

Border, 155

Page size, 155

Start printing, 155

Time stamp, 155

Print set (DPOF), 150

Printing, 150

Programmed auto, 80

Protecting photographs, 139

Small picture, 216

Speedlight, 233

Spot, 87

Quick retouch, 221

Quick Settings Display, 12

Straighten, 221

Television, 146

Thumbnail, 135

Timer, 66

Trim, 213

Turn, 27

Rear-curtain sync, 71

Recent settings, 224

Red-eye correction, 212

Red-eye reduction, 71

Release mode, 64

continuous, 64, 65

high speed, 64, 65

low speed, 64, 65, 182

Two-button reset, 75

USB, 149, 151

278

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Nokia Headphones HS 53W User Manual
Optoma Technology Projector TW6353D User Manual
Oregon Scientific Thermometer BAR122HGLA User Manual
Oster Hair Clippers 76076 User Manual
PAC Automobile Parts SWI X User Manual
Panasonic Air Compressor DC57C84RCU6 User Manual
Panasonic CRT Television CT 27D10U User Manual
Panasonic Electric Shaver ES2262 User Manual
Panasonic Network Card 2SA2084 User Manual
Panasonic Webcam DMC SZ5 User Manual